Home

LucidStudio User's Guide

1. 744 User Defined Spectral Distributions User defined spectral Distributions are specified via the following dialog m No specific distributions used wich means that the chosen re a Bectance refraction Index or exponential absorption constant is the same oral wavelengths This choice yields no further dalog elements step function Defines the distribution function as a step function of arbitrary values which are aranged equidstanty in wavelength Please Tafer also to LucidTechnical pdr The values for Anan Amas Set the wavelength interval in nm In detail the number af entered function values defines the number af steps where each step takes a wavelength interval of gan nu d incon The usage of this functions very similar to that af the step func tlon excep that the function values are linearly Interpolated to hal a piecewise linear function Here Net values are needed to have N linear segments E Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials aay cin v FNEPHORXSUAMAM select function Acontrol curve can be selected from the geo view or tree view This curve serves as the reflection refraction ar absorption func ion The control curve self contains ist of U and V values 7 6 2 Special Dispersion and Emission Functions Besides the option to use any arbitrary user defined spectral distribution Lucdstape already contains some important special builtin distributions These are explained in the fol
2. 5 Geometry 4 3 7 Swept Surface Creates a swept surface The surface s created bya curve swept alonga spine cure prole cuve The curve which should be swept along the spine curve spine cave The cuve which shouldbe used as spine curve 43 8 Swung Surface Creates a swung surface A SwungSurtace isa surface le a RotSurface but mith a varying radius The surface s obtained by swinging the aD prone curve around the Z anis and simultaneously scaling accordingly to thespine curve and by an arbitrary scaling factor alpha Like in Rot Surface the spine and the profile curve should be 2D Y curves The z coordin ates are ignored profile curve The curve which should be rotated spine curve The curve which is used to vary the radius pha An extra scaling factor used for the radius calculation 439 Surface from Formula Creates a surface from an entered formula The surface may be created asa value gid or asa iting surface with approximation interpolation methods expli pormeterfom The formulas either displayed in explicit orin parameter form parameter The parameters of the surface formuloz fix The explicit formula of the surface Geomety orto x yis a9 The formula in parameter form ofpointsxYoruV The number of points in X Y or UV direction respectively Xrange min max Yrange min The min max range of the surface on the X Y aiis U range min max Vronge min The min
3. Specification ofthe light source emitters This determines the base characteristic of the emitted light This e g can be directional all emitted rays are parallel to each other as long as they do not intersect isoradiant stropie spacial emittance or something intermediate explained n detail in Section 7 2 Emitter Mater pon ane a re ie eme oe m Light Sources eta fux Sets the tatal output of his ight source t either im or IW half width at holf max HWHM Measured in the prole ofthe beam the value determines the lg restricted angle range start medium for emitted rays adio button spectral power distribution SPO efficacy distance between the centre of he outgoing light and the pint at which the power is dwn to 50 in the prof this gives the Spatial distribution ofthe autgenglght E ga very smali value refers to a almost laserike beam whereas a very high value means almost parallel igit Please also se the sketch Below checked the solid angle of ihe emitted light can be restricted The entered value sets the maximum allowed angle relative 10 the narmal Within this solid angle rhe light intensity is distrib ted as specie by the HWHM value The refraction index ofa starting ray can beset manually This can be used ifthe source shall be inside a medium ein alight gue The default value is nex which means a ray starting paint in air The SPD contrals the behaviour of e
4. Tore ae gg Cer C apum C Med QD C Boone Ranta 15 Iu R do gt moe vmi mods j j n Tie The Data Propert Ve radio button color tone map linea The mapping into oz5slis done linearly this is the ping tpe most primitive ype Togartumle The mapping s done logarithmically sis much loser to the human perception Munsell This mapping version also belongs to the class of logarithmic mappings twi produce a smoother solution than the logarithmic mapping OpentXR exponential The intention of these wo types isto emulate camera settings The original mapping algorithm sug gestedby OpenEXR was introduced to post process video and Photo shots They both belong to the family of logarithmic i sorts too In the exponential version one is able to modiy Views the slope of the mapping cuve and the mapping is scaled to the incoming data Reinhard os This ypeusesthe Reinhard Dein method The mapping to low dynamic display devices ssimlar to adaptation processes nich occur in the human visual system Physilo Bal evidence suggests that adaptation already occurs in the photoreceptors leading to a straightforward model that an De easily adapted for tane reproduction Ts type uies to emulate the adaptation processes which occur in the human Visual system Pag Gammacorrection Activating or de activating the gamma conection performs a change ofthe color space to be used dip RGB values Av
5. sensor and the assemblability of tne lamp pedestrian way width Determines the width ofthe pedestrian way beside the road sur face Ths width is added to the street width to calculate the complete extent to be luminated E Applications orton of side flf Defines therelativelengthafazone ofdeceasingafilluminance Starting at the border towards the centre of the laminated Toadway normalized to side range Fram the defined position the illuminance wl fal doen with a constant gradient towards the very end of the side range 4 05 sde ange would e half the side range on either side target light valve Determines the wanted amount of ight onthe middle othe road outside the fat n radio buttan angle type Selects the angle type which shali be sed for calculating the LID Le the coordinate system The picture just below shows an example the wanted luminance distribution upper pari is given ether directly via a Ji fle ar via the entered parameters the lamer part shows the resulting LID to be inserted In the lamp poe to achieve the specified LiD gue 11 22 ample wit the wanted LD an the rond per part and ated LD iwer par 3 Applications 313 Tests Thefourtools Flament image Viewer Source Position Checker BSDF Maker and Sky Light Checker have fly similar tasks furthermore the dialogs do not differ very much AII four tals are used quite the same way Ht first press into model th
6. Fue s MF reflector lens dialog Set MF source The Set MF source button triggers the Dialog for the free form lamp for MF the MF application The Six tabs allow the section from automotive amps high beam ow beam signal the Also a Source an be selected or created in this dialog Lamp XY position Hace the light source in the cartesian system Fux Speciythelminous Nux ofthe source This will defaultthe values From a chosen lamp model but can be altered manual fic Speciy he efficacy os This can be usd to account or specie aswellas overall losses lamp hole absorber Radius and location of an absorber disc representing the amp hole and socket Lc 0 aaee n n eae one Fare 6 MF refector ers dialog Set Gaps Tospecily the gaps between facets and also their connection types please consult the Macrafocal Application Manual or details the Set Gaps button opens anew dialog window You speciiy he horizontal and vertical gaps separately al gaps same Cheek this bax Ifyou have more than one gap but you want to use the same ap type for all gaps n that direction Ej From Geometries Menu Selection select gop select ype nop ste X2 2 This selection appears only if you have more than two facets in a direction else there will be only V or Ha To select the dap between the two verte facets 2 and 3 chose V2 The type of facet gaps conection is chosen here Please
7. brandenburg gmbh Sir eat eth LucidStudio User s Guide p LucidSha ape Computer Aided Lighting Lucdstudio User s Guide LucidStudio User s Guide ube uy 8 204 Table of Contents Getting started with Luc studio La Lcistudio Overen ee 12 Principles af LucidStudio 55 124 Shapes Zu 122 Views 4 diggs Mote INN raaa An TENEAT 124 Peculiarties of Lucidstudi 3 13 The Fist Example A Guide to LucidStudla a 13 Create an Empty Geomety le nnn HE 132 Create a Cylinder Light Source 2 133 Define a Reflector Surface 2 134 Cite Speisen ederet eem ae 135 Simile the scene E 2 lend Eat s Da tditing ucdShape Documents Ji 22 Saving LucidShape Documents Saves 253 Transferring Geometry between Lucldshape and CAD fol E 2 34 The CATA Taner Dal rcr 2 2 The Rhino Transfer Dialog e e M 2 4 Transformed input and Output 3 35 O PE sarre a e E E p aa M 27 Standard Eding 7 PT pRa e ANEAN ay SEGA oaaae ee e 344 General Commands ae 3 2 Selection Modes s Vile aean paiana M 354 Car mer a 3 18 Objects Coloring and Dapiay rere DM 347 Advanced Display Properties a2 32 Tree View 46 Sint aeaea 325 te onsa dl 323 Tree Display a 32 Elements Display Fiteting reme CAI 38 AT penti aS ER 34 W Viem a kk Gatti DEA eaa a EE EEE A 3442 Color Scaling and Scene ines erre rr 48 3443 Operations on the Data 49 Decree AT TRIUMPHI INIT gt 45 Spectral specie options rer rnc fi 345 Detailed Vi
8. un Double click LMB Over Geo mery SHIFT IM CTRL SHIFT LMB cree Ma CTRL Double click LB ke SHIT RMB TRL SHIFT RMB CIR ama CTRL Double click RMB Scroll Wheel in amp Out Hold Scroll Wheel Ca Tree View une ton and RMB stands for Right Mouse Button Rotates geometry within the geometry view Selects the geometry under the mouse cursor Zooms in and out within the geometry view Zoom in on the rectangular region selected Activates the interactive ray tracers with a single ray bundle Freezes the interactive ray tracer ray bundle on the surface Activates the context menu Displays surface dimensional information under the mouse cursor Displays dimensional information about the window under the Activates the interactive ray tracers with a grid af ray bundles Feezestheinteractve ray tracer rdf ay bundles on the surface Zooms in and out within the geometry view Pans the geometry view Selects the tree object under the mouse cursor Double Click MB Over Tree Ob Opens the edit dialog box or the tree object jen CTRL Ui SHIT B kite Scroll Wheel in amp Out Hold Scroll Whee Selects multiple ee objets one at a time Selects multiple tree objets from first selected object to the end object under the mouse cursar Activates the context menu Displays angular coordinates under the mouse cursar Activates the context menu Zooms in and out within the light screen view Pans the
9. Hak oa iue 8 1 The Monte Carlo Ray Trace Dialog wavelength ronge The wavelength ange determines the range ofthe complete used spectrum the channels divide this spectrum Into eventy divided smaller parts For more detailed information please see also Chapter 3and of LucidTechnical pdf Pag use only rays with single Regardless if this Rag s en or disabled the simulation result wavelength Contains spectral Information the only diference is the efor during a simulation If checked LucidShape is dicing the wavelength af each starting Tay the wavelength distribution s due to the SPD defined and this wavelength wil be counted in the sensor Mt unchecked one ray carries the complete spectral information Le the spectrum defined by the SPD and this complete spectral distribution wili be counted in the sensor When such 2a ne Sects with a wave length dependant surface Le a surface with a Simulation rado button simulation method tesseliation parameter Pag use multiprocessing Pag randomize roy files dispersion or wave length dependant absorption Lucidtapeis dicing a wavelength and from this intersection coordinates on the rayis traced using this single wavelength The second case has a higher effort during a simulation So when there are wave length dependent surfaces in the model tis recommended to sclate the fag NURBS This isthe most accurate simulation method because it directiy uses the
10. Here Lcistape wil show warnings or eror when the current operation was not possible Maybe he selected entry in the TreeView Goes nt mate the selected enty Inthe dalog 7 Emitter Materials Diferent emitter types can be assigned to the geometry in order to make a light source Basically an emitter is defined bythe following options and parameters Hee a _ oer ia fom p owe 74 The Create Emitter Dialog ist This lst shows the basic emittertypes they are explalnedin detail Inthe folloning subsections So wapa Determines the total power output af this ight source given either in imor in w half width ot half max HWHM Measured in the profile of the beam the value determines the distance between te centre of Ihe outgoing light and te point Which the power is down to 50 inthe pofl this gives the Spatial distribution of the outgoing light Eg a very small value refers to a almost laser tike beam whereas a very Nigh value means almost parallel light I Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials Please refer also to Section 6 a Base Options and Parameters for botn a declaration and sketch of WM Pag restritedanglerange W checked it Is possible to constrict the outgoing light this is in dependent to tne profile ofthe beam see HWHM right above The positive value R cuts off the cosine emission outside the an gular range RRL start medium foremitied rays Theretraction index attached
11. Input parameter are described in FF Fresnel Lens Outer Optic Inner Opti The addtional parameter weight fr VaroSurface and additional ight target parameter are described below weight for VaroSurface The weight Tor the surfaces ofthe f vara Fresnel lens Values of os for both up down and left right are leading toa round shape delta up down The weight for the varo surface up down delta eferight The weight for the varo surface left right Geometry target ongles The ray output angles in NS direction Fa ar eld is used any number target angles WE The ray output angles in WE direction Qf a far feld is used any number target P positions NS The desired ray output position radi on the target z plane in NS direction a near Beld is used any number target R positions WE The desired ray output position radii on the target lane in WE direction fa near feld i used any number target plone The postion af the target plane in z direction viun R postions NS Te ray output postion raion the virtual2 plane in NS direction ta virtual near field is used any number vitu postions WE The ray output positian radii on the virtualz plane in WE direction ia virtual pear eld is used any nomber vitu plane The position ofthe virtual z plane in z direction Jens paoman ek cue dando nnar outu op m p B m mores Aga TF iini peta C art pee gre 41 The F Variable F snet Lens dialog 4
12. T tman endi be nce ore be ader cal aro nt braaa Range should be defined on cell center Basically tnis Flag changes the starting position af the complete sensor and thus the single sensrcelis Checkths agit you want to define the sensor fange manual with the positions of the cell centers For examples Usually a flle sensor iS set up withthe range of e360 Thats because LiddShape defines the sensor ranges by the edges which you want to have in your result and it compensates any overlap or exceeded teli ses When using this fiag you have to specify the cell center minimum and maximum positions manual With a cell size of Au s this would be 0 4 359 5 building 36o cells each 1 apart This way the fist cellis located at o the last one at 355 Thus no overlap is created Attention A setting o o co with Au 1 in contrast would result in 3 celis being created and oand 360 being the same cell this will lead to double counts Switches for selective incoming roys activate the sensor ters theincoming rays and accepts any those rays f r which the entered values for retraction index and absorption coeffcient coin Tide Also Rags can be set to only count direct rays rays which come directly fom the int source WITHOUT ANY interaction orindirect rays inthe sensor e with at least one interaction ete owt weg 99 Waren P rene risen sone ardor ra FT aontonciiet F CENTROS Take onyrays ina cone of interest e
13. ambhvde producs lcidshape downloade witepapers 1224 Hardware Graphics Accelerator fis Nag is enabled the Lucidstape geometry rendering of 3D objects Wil be supported by the graphics board QF any is installed Otherwise 30 objects wil be rendered by standard MS Windows routines 1225 COM Server The MS Windows COM technology is used for seamlessly without having to read ar save data in temporary fles manual exchanging geometry data between LucidShape and external tools Ike CATIA or i Rhinoceros You must apply Register this program as COM server before You can perform any such data exchange preferably before you start the external tool m only Unregister this program as COM server when you are finished with your data exchange as any COM server needs some system resources E Miscellaneous Menus 12 3 Window This menu presents various common window positioning commands m Cascade Cascades ali non iconized view Tile Horizontally Resizes and arranges ali non conized views horizontally so they a ihe Luc shape desktop Te Vertealy Resizes and arranges allnon iconized views vertically so they fil he LucdShape desktop Arange conized Views Arranges all iconized views at the bottom of the LucldShape desto ose Ali loses all open views In addition type specific commands ike Cose All GeoViews are avalable for all types o tucdshape views Open Message View Opens the message view fit is not already ap
14. button invert Inverts the respective axis Le toggles the algebraic sign of the values from postive to negative and vice versa latitude Defines the geographic position degree of latitude ofthe exper iment north or south af tne equator 3 9 longitude Defines the geographic position degree of longitude of the ex periment east or west of the prime meridian 480 8o time zone meridian Defines the time zone in which you specify the local time A time gone of zero equals GMT doy of year Defines the day ofthe year running fram o to 366 tine ofthe doy The eal time of day in hours running from oto 24 selec set model parameters fog set ralonce opticatdepth rbidty Select either sun disc model or clear sky model and choose the color temperature Alternatively you can manually define the iradianceforbeth models An irradiance of zero uses the results from the selected mode Ieheckedthe defaultirragiance value ofthe model is overwnitten with the entered value Defines the extinction coefficient in the Rayleigh scattering for mula it expresses the quantity of light removed rom a beam by scattering or absorption during ts path through a medium here ihe atmosphere This factor defines the haze or cloudiness ofthe sky a measure af air pollution dust and fog 7 Light Sources 6 5 Ray Trace Bundles This section describes the various ray trace bundles you an choose for the interactive ray tracin
15. esit sensor type Choose the sensor type to be attached to all currently selected shapes Possible types are flow sensar see Section 7 4 5 Light Flow Sensor or ray fle sensor see Section 742 ay Hle Sensor assign to Here the target shape set may be specified Available choices areali surface shapes selected surface shapes ar selected abject Vectors sets For a description of volume Sensors see Sec on 7 44 Volume Sensor volume sensor An abject selection dialog to pick the volume sensar which isas signed to the selected shapes 74 7 Illumination Lux Light Flux Lumen and Luminance Candela per m Sensor Materials Asensormaterisl which may be connected to a surface usually a plane to deteclluminaion in lux ight Rux in tumen or luminance in candela per mAn optical seale factor can be used for an overall scaling ofthe Experimentat setup The Humination sensar also can be preloaded with a constant ox value This may be used in reverse sensor light in order to calculate a LID fora point light source which results in exactly the same constant ght distr Dol Lm Ca bution on the sensor cell size The all size ofthe sensor scaled by the unit factor A cellsize of aims at a cell area of unit factor m n the ral shape Loc stape will realize this discretization ofthe inal sensar shape s surface in the global coordinate system as good as pos sie lobo scale A global scale faciorintheintenal oto take a
16. ims eo pow Waban iri mia PURUS Be pe m ital light source position 2 The position ofthe virtual light source in orientation tit rot The orientation it and rotation af the beam of the virtual ight a source in degrees Ub range uw The ange of the LID in the candela sensor in and v apply reverse tight Applies the reverse sensor ight method t creates a Candeia sensor and updates the LIDData Applications The tb lamp switch allows to switch ar toggle between the formerly created lamp sets After one has switched an ar off a lamp set the shown luminance automatically is scaled to distribute the new total light ux onto the complete monitor range from Black to white Thus diferent sets with different light funes may be shown with the same luminance on the monitor but wih different nin maxvaluesforthis range To avoid this automatic scaling epenthe sub daog Road Properties Inthe tab settings and check the flag fi range eres ere see iam 0S ee Wes De hgh fn Rees C em hgh Chon E De m arte Figure 127 The Lemp Site Sings Inthe last tab some general settings may be done The upper part let you define different positions ofthe driver the 20m view and the pedestrian view The number tiple Background color defines the color and the brightness af the sky and thus the ambient lighting In case al hree values are equal with increasing values the color goes from black over grey to white Emph
17. pem m m j m BR 1 T tpi foc ata d c s B as C ertt C oae m mes perse mm am gre 4 23 The FF Peesnet Lens dialog 4 64 TIR Total Internal Reflection Lens Creates a TR Total internal Reflection lens particularly suitable for LED applications A TIR lens paralielizes ight tom lambertian sources by making use ofthe lens Internal reflections Geometry Thefist options are identical to thase of the previous tens Free Form Fresnel Lens ings fcside surface thickness light target target angles target R positions target plane Vitus Rpositions Virtual plane ese Defines the number of ings of the lens This fag erabiesjdisables a closing surface on the exit face Defines the thickness of the lens The target type Farfield theoutgoing rays leave the lens towards the direction ofthe given target angles Mearfieid theoutgoingrays leave the lens toward the entered position on the target z plane Virtual near field The rays leave the lens asif coming troma Start point on the vituaz plane The ray output angles fa far feld is used any number The desired ray output position radii on the target z plane fa near field is used any number The position af the target plane in z direction The ray output position radii on the virtual z lane fa virtual near ied is used any number The position in z direction af the vitual plane Switch to Fresnel retraction E
18. pressed displays a tla coordinate system at the point af the tem Surface the mouse points at Two anis of the coordinate system Visualize the tangents of the two coordinate ines ede arcere The third blue is the normal CTRL plus Middle Wheel But After pressing CTRL and the middle whee button or left and ton or Lef ond RMB right button simultaneousiy the ray trace start position af bundle Tays is moved This only works I rays have already been frozen seo Interactive Ray Trace Geometry Vien Mouse Wheel Geometyand Within the geometry and the data view one can zoom in and out Dota View Zoominand Out by moving the mouse wheel in upper zoom in ar lower oom ou direction 1 2 4 Peculiarities of LucidStudio Dialog Box Techniques Mast dialogs offer you to assign somettingtoan existing object or to choose one ar several objects or external data fes far the intended operation These dialogs always fallow the same sequence n dialogs with sel buttons abject selection buttons first cick the button A new dialog box with eel done appears When you have selected the abject you desire press the sel done button and the dialog wili clase This is the standard procedure for this type of dialag selection Far dialogs wih for fle selection fles are selected by pressing the fl selection button A fle selection box appears where you enter a fle name or select the required directory When you have ished selecting tne fl
19. we can calculate this reverse sensor light The obtained result is a LID This LID will reproduce the former ight distribution n all sensors when is laminating the original scene instead ofthe original ight source There i a conceptual affinity ta holography Simulation wesmoen a d d n d iiras I E E i dies m Lio rain me Lapin me m E ngeunan C venil C wee erae Figure p The Reverse Sensor Light Dialog ome The name ofthe reverse sensor light distribution light source position light The position and the orientation af the lacal axis system of the source direction ond base vector virtual point ight source UD dimension The number af entries in u and v direction Ub range nu LUD range nv The WV range ofthe light intensity distribution Le the cone o interest angle rype Determines the angle type Le type B pole type A pola or type C pole See the Technical Reference manual Tor more derailed information 8 6 3 Luminance Image Sensor Light A luminance image Is created by a fast backward ray trace where the light is collected fom the loaded sensors in the scene The luminance distribution is always seen roma given anis system Please note Luminance ls an per area based dimension In consequence only surface sensors are compatible with this function there has te be at least one sensor for let s say luminance i ofpielinuv This determines the resolution ofthe image to be created fl
20. 32 Gusson scattering SDF ja Gaussion Curve E Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials More general BSDFsare often based an numerical measurements afa material taken from diferent light input angles Usually the data is stored ja tabular form Depending on the respective supplier itan be saved e g In three columns containing the angle pair theta and phi and the belonging intensity In other cases there I a separate fle for each theta angle so the measured data isnot Stored in a single fle but in a folder Here comes the LucldShape BSDF wizard into play It reads complete data sets gathered from such samplings and transforms them to suitable BSOF cures 74 2 The Wizard s Dialog Elements Basically the BSDF Wizard consists ofthe following faur parts Fle input part BSDF data fles may be read in several formats Usually multiple fles are read Where each fle contains a material measurement om a fixed input angle The data fles appear ina fies Curve ype creation part Select here the types of SDF curves to be created Filtering part Enables the smoothing of SDF data Anscissas aus type Sets the avis type far the BSDF curve s display in the geometry view Cesoanbeuonat MUST ORAE DUMP clue D CVR pu Im Gertie esie secrete lone fd seta ew Flanesunmet ove c rem Sot owk Omm T p p ie 7 3 ESOF Wann Dialog E Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials radio button i
21. Apply identical alltabs isthe possibilty to copy the currently selected object just bya click anto Copy direct interaction Maves rotates or scales the selected object interactively in the GeoView corresponding to the entered values de dy d move Shifts the selected object directly by the entered vector pivot pointxyz The coordinates o ihe paint the geometry is rotated or scaled about E Te xyazfactors forscaling objects eta value ofi increases the object in the respective direction by sj Wer Aton Mhohhaen fas ABA Aten Pu sae fase Radedmiie ae Se ise Retee abaa atts ae ce je sede eee EB Hees ll Tem 6 BI R le Gs Ocw Qe Figure 4 3 The Dialog Parts or ove and Seale O E j aj By Sja F rotate Tre drect interaction rotates the object aboutitsownanis system Using the rotation angles wl be rotated relative to the pot Peint l values are in degree ratate about ine Theroaton line defines a straight ine running rom xyz to ya The pairts or the whole ne may also be seeded 7 Geometry Wer atone To Paten deje ste ct es alode Aue in Tem ardeat Mowe Sese Rime Ramesszire Cain eda SCR 6 J mE sd kl Soe al P Ye sje races p EDEN pro LA Dummy o E dm Deal m Fire The Dilog Parts for Rott an Rotate about Line miror Reflec
22. Determines the type of tering Available are no fitering at al weak and strong fitering The choles weak and strong enable one dimensional smoothing af measurement data an their input Into Lucidshape Additional the number of smoothing passes default may be specified The curves are created either with radians as their domain units horizontal axis or with degreesas their domain units horizontal ari This is for test purposes only and nat to be used for eal BSDE cures Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials Beside the BSDF wizard other BSDF Data easily can be imported just by drag amp drop among ather rdf mac or re The header of the respective Me is scanned and the belonging dialog opens up For performing the last adjustments EE Re ensayo owe 7 34 SDF import ame The name ofthe BSDF Data to appear in the TreeView fiag relative to specular diec Depending on whether the data is BRDF or BTDF the fag has to tion be checked or unchecked button auto setofboundvalues When importing the flets among other the Degree o Reflection DoR is computed In case ane value af an angle or a fle is outside the range o he measurement cannot be imported One can either re scale this single le y manually changing the value or the complete measurement by pressing this button radio button fle import options In case of REFLET data the single files do not contain the complete RERED measu
23. Editor 1031 Loading liDS eee 103 2 Options and Parameters nnn 1533 Editing UDs 104 Dynamic D Edhar Lee 14 1 Introduction and Principle 555 15 2 Bample a1 Applications 4 General Autamative Jepicain nnn ta Stanic Road Simulation 1142 Virtual Beam Pattern M43 tense Plate eee e e 3124 Retro Reflector 112 General Application 112 1 Aircraft Lighting a 1122 Test Room for Indoor Lighting 112 3 Street lamination 3124 Reverse Sreet Light Pate Calculation nnna k Taaa 1133 BSDF Maker a2 Miscellaneous MENUS ma k arera 12 2 Options 1224 Global Settings onn ee 1223 Working Directory for Open Save vn 1223 Editing of LD Test Tables 1224 Hardware Graphies Accelerator 1225 COM Semer e 12 3 Window 124 Help 244 License Check oaccs oe 12 42 Shorts to LaciiShape Documents A Lucidshape Fle Types KAA Tetlbar kets ananena AME 3 E eea desee M ass 255 emer 257 FA enc 364 ax Lag 269 270 NINOS an eee st neeneae fk 25 a7 eenei m Mec 284 285 Mese 286 287 visi TUNI E een ee 299 Seena E 302 308 303 vc 304 304 305 Luc studi User s Guide Ba Common Tons gt View Options and Manipulation Tals 3 Simulation and Script Execution Tole Le TM e Geometry WM Tool iaai 85 UV Lgh Data View Tools a ms s C Mouse Interaction Reference od E Gael Me rennen ee eaer D Cz Tre View C3 gn Se
24. Model Rhino Adds the LuciShape scene to an ex isting scene within Rino Selected Surfaces 3 Rhino Transfers the selected surfaces into Rhino Rhino Scene new model Transfers the Rhino scene into LucidShape and opens a new GeoView Rhino Scene curent model Transters the Rhino scene into the curent scene of LuciShape E Fileand Eat selected Rhino surfaces curent scene Transfers the selec ted Rhino surfaces into tne cunent scene af LuciaShape we E I t9 fr n I7 p NP prem emm pue poem pepe Figure 2 2 The hio arse Dialog 2 4 Transformed Input and Output These commands allow input and output of geometry while applying a linear transformation with a company axis system see Section 12 2 Global Settings open add save transformed Parent menu entry for the commands described subsequently SE open transformed Like open but any geometry undergoes alinear transformation by the company axis system before ts read into LucidShape add transformed Lie add but any geometry undergoes a linear transformation byte company ats system before tis read into LucidShape save transformed Uke save as but any geometry undergoes a linear transforma on by the company axis system before ti saved toa fle 2 5 Menu Operations A menu le is a do script le containing declarations of script functions which are executable as menu items The menu can be overwritten by your own menu
25. Pag freeze ronge fog show ocal maximum Yale range mia max button set button default range range Pag iso lines fog isotropic Pag colar bar Pag asis numbers grid dea inu v show WV angle ines diagram grid ype Pag grid deta Figure 3 2 The UV Data Properties View 0 checked the value range in the UWView is not updated after every simulation but stays in the specified range 1f checked the UWiew shows additional formations inthe text ne Sets the minimum and maximum value pressed the current settings are applied onto the UWew pressed the value range in the dialog ie adopted ramthevalues Inthe Wien Determines the range af the uv data via tnin Unan Vain 20d Ymar Switches the iso lines les with same intensity on off Switches isotropic on off disabled the view will be distorted insuch way that the model s bounding box ls the whole view This is convenient for models with extreme aspect ratlos ke for example certain spectral curves with a large wavelength range anda small value range enabled Le in an isotropic view the Tatia ofthe display rectangle isthe same as the value rectangle The color bar at the bottom af the data view may be switched on off Switches the axis legend onjuf Determinesthe resolution ofthe gid the Nag allows to show hide the grid lines in the Uie Wf checked the UV angle lines ina polar vieware shown otherwise they are hidden Toggles the view and the gri
26. Propet Dilog view axis Specifies the view camera postion and viewing direction poston The ya postin fom wherethe object orthe scene viewed view direction sting Depending on the checked mode polar rot polar the view direction can be entered dieclyas a ya vector orin polar coordinates via pole asis x y or 2 pius two rotation angles up direction The vector for the camera up view ri Views projection settings The type af camera projection perspective viewing area is spe tiled by a feld af view angl or orthogonal viewing area is specified by a view extend eld of view ange The viewing area in the perspective case arizontal and vertica or view extent The viewing area in the orthogonal case width And eight adio button word scaling This radio button allows to modiy the ratio of the camera s x y and z viewing anes Le distorts the view no scaling Does not make any changes at all manual Changes the ratio to the specified se fitto model Automatically adjusts the ratio ta optimally tinto the GeoView e distorts the view button modiy pressed the current settings are applied from the dialog into the GeoView button update itpressed the current settings are applied fromthe GeoViewinto the dalog 3 2 Tree View rie te Teen Gees Fender Ugitiowces Masi Sensors Sean ou 44 Tee Vien Menu Thefolloning menu entries are available under TreeView 324 Selections
27. Retro reflex Reflective This material is similar to ordinary Gaussian reflective material but the main outgoing ras direction is always identical to tne incoming rays direcion instead of being determined by the classical law of reflection The gaussian distribution function works with respect to this direction ehereitachieves ts maximum This effectis realized by small refractive ements on the surface M parameters are the same as with the ordinary Gaussian reflective ma terial no reactive version is available here 73 6 Lambert Gauss Combination Reflective and Refractive Combines Lambertian and Gaussian materia toa combo material with the combination ratio an individual material can be created valable for both reflective and refractie type of actor combination ratio The ratio ofthe diferent types may be set independently to each others the sum ofall values should be equal ta to Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials 737 2D BSDF Theta Curve Reflective and Refractive Bul sa reflective or refractive actor material by direct application ofa RS ISDF control curve which may either be picked from the tree view or uZ created via the BSDF wizara see Section 77 The BSDF Wizard The 2D curve is a function af zenith angle On spherical coordinates and itis ihe same for all azimuth angles of incidence Thus it exhibits rotational symmetry around the anis of normal incidence BSDF curve defin
28. Selection Poe SERES Enc tom DATES J amp AUTHORSS marr seges Ores Orien Figure 5 38 The staring Dialog of the Model Documentation The right part ofthe dialog shows options and input boxes in dependency on the type ofthe respect ive page This type can be chosen among several possiblities which al have different functions in the complete presentation Document Setup smia PowerPoint template button clear template button export PPT button sanity check button apply page titie Types ot Pages Here four strings can be pre defined for later use inthe presenta tion When creating the documentation these placeholders wil bereplaced with the respective strings Thus the respective entries nly have to be changed n the setup part not on every single page Here a template can be chosen e g with a company lago and predefined fields and options entered left right aligned W pressed the template choice is cleared pressed the presentation is created using the current settings it pressed the settings wil be checked against some sources of pressed current settings are applied into the DesignFeature inthe mode Determines the page title to appear in the presentation The following table sts the different page types and the available optons and parameters From Geometries Menu Selection blank poge tite page geometry page Creates a blank page e g to separate dierent parts
29. a Windows colar selection dialog toselect the desired background color background color default background color black white Sets the background colar of the view in focus Sets the default background color for al light screen views The change wil first come inta effect when opening the next light Screen view I wil neither affect the view currently in focus nor ther already opened views unless a redraw commands erected subsequently Toggles between black white and color display 354 Screen View Properties This selection opens a property sheet to set various advanced light screen view options sereen ype plone distance With ECE road lines grid deta xy text postion and range position of grid numbers D ih Ci eco ET Lets you choose between pole or y pole angle display The z plane display changes rom angles to geometric units inthe dis play at the z plane postion The distance ofthe projection plane only for the z plane option Enables the display of ECE road ines in the sereen view only for and yang Sets the resolution ofthe displayed grid onl fors and angles Sets the text position and range only for x and angles Two checkboxes which determine the positions oe horizontal bottom orto and vertical feft or right axes annotations pr oto mom mm gure 3 2 Sereen View Menu a E Chapter 4 Geometry Thebetter part ofa design process istypcally spent with developm
30. a ti 9 Interpolte LIDs from Test Tables This menu entry pops up the test table dialog which is described in more detail in Section 9 1 Apply Test Tables in contrast to evaluating ex sting Ds however it uses interpolation methods to compute a new idealized model LID which matches the selected regulation in the test table The picture right below shows two examples created with this toot Upper part ECE front tum signal lamps ECE R6 Cat 1 left lower part USA Daytime nunning light gt SAE 2087 tab 2 zones E Analysis of Geometry and LID Data owe Tuo interpolated LIDS eed with the too 93 LID Data Conversion 934 Surface from LID Data tool compute a surface from the uv data view in focus The surface Is created Gn a special geometry view as a piecewise linear NURBS surface whieh may be used elsewhere In LocidStudio d gt E Analysis of Geometry and LID Data marani mmen irmoki owe 9 8 The Create Surface from UD Dialog minnar inu v Determines the ranges afu and v respectively number points in u V The number of points to bul the curve 7 viewname sufacename Determines the names for the view and the surface respectively radio button coordinate system Determines whether the curve shall be created in cartesian or polar coordinates radio button coordinate system Chooses the range where the luminance is to be measured fog colored display Determines whe
31. ags above shows anexample ofthe compact re view Once youselectan entry the object is highlighted also in the geometry view For example a simple cylindrical ih source shape enlisted in the tree would be Inked t two further entries A CylinderSurface geometry and a LambertEmitter material Even in complex experiments you will be able to quickly deny and select one ar several elements within the ree If dialog boxes are implemented in the setup they an be started by double mouse click dieci Irom the ee Geometry view The geometry view displays the geometric parts af your experimental setup in 30 switchable to 20 planes e g surfaces of reflectors reiractors light sources and detectar geometries tis also possible to display certain kinds of data associated witha surface e g surface curvature or lamine tion data ofa sensar Also in this window the geometry can be analyzed by using interactive ray Getting started with Lucudia For good orientation an anis system is visualized Furthermore you can zoom objects and change between different dlsplay types ke light data shaded black amp white and wire ame Objects can e selected by double clicking e with your mouse You can for example also choose between selecting geometries only or the complete shape see Sertion 1 2 3 Mouse Interaction A good example of the geometry view is shown in Figure 1 2 The Geo View The experiment on display consists af two lenses
32. an ony be used in combination witha point ight saure Agar from the parameters already described above ux efficacy start refraction index there are no addtional parameters 724 Ray File Emitter An emitter type uses a LID saved ina ray fle This ray fle may be created bya previous simulation For the use of ry fles please see also Section 6 6 aye and Rayfile Toole a 725 UD File Emitter EE AEC internal Grom previous cmiaton or extent porting a LD ce ated by another sofware This emiter can Be used ony incantation gt ath a point ight source 726 LID Curve Emitter Light emitter witha lightintensity distribution taken fromthe component ofa control curve to be chosen This emitter can be used any in combin atian with a point light source i a I Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials lr z m Figure 7 5 Tbe D Curve Emiter Diog parts UD curve fle name The path and the name of the fle which holds the curve to be used angle rype Defines the angle type B type pol A type pol or type pale radio button curvein v Determines whether the given curve is defined inu orinv direc tion min maxin rthogoea rection Defines the uv ange depending on the usage af the curve ifthe curve is usedi in u direction it defines the vange and viceversa 723 UD Surface Emitter Pope errr pea e a point ight source qm UD surface fle name The path and the name of the fle whi
33. approximated or interpolated through the points The surface s stored 35a NURBS surface The NURBS data is calculated during the object onstruction by interpolation or approximation The surface sellis defined bya point grid fength uv consisting ofa vector with nu U parameter avedarwih nv V parameters and three vectors with CY les select point ri read point grid See Section 4 8 Common Dialog Parts 4 832 Read Value Grid Thevaloegriddata canbe read rom a data fle For the curent implement ation the data fle must have nun values in one column d mu The length ofthe U and V parameter array select value grid fle See Sertion 48 Common Dialog Parts z Geometry 4 833 Create Explicit Surface Creates an explici surface from a value grid The surface has the explicit mathematical form z f xy and is stored asa NURBS surface The NURBS data is calculated during the abject construction by an interpolation or an approximation algorithm The surface fs defined by a value grid af lengih nutn it consists afa vertar with nu U parameters a vector with 1v V parameters and a vector with nutny Z values The sequences of the and V parameters have to be In a constant increasing or decreasing or der The value grid abject may have more than one matrices of values The used matris chosen by an index select value grid eod value See Section 4 83 Common Dialog arts grid surface approximation Parameters surface n
34. case the name ofthe windows does not update automatically perform a double cickinto the GeoView E Applications 7 The further proceeding ow sto create an actor material from this just saved fle Meni Ma terial gt Create Actor Material 3D BSDF Re lector Refractor and choose the BSDF fle Create or import a surface then assign the mate al via the entry inthe TreeView onto tis surface as a result you obtain a BSDF shape The number of rays used for each single simulation is quite important using a too ow number results in aigh noise level a too high number noticeable Increases the e size ofthe saved SSDF ata The delta aF the angles thus the angular distance between o shots should be rather Smali to increase the resolution of the BSDF data A recommended delta is about 1 to 3 but not more thans simulation range light source pm ene p Exi sca aaa Eales _ Foe EUIS ita ot facto b pm oe m ea mm jen Stik a ema Boris Qi Dee Figure 1223 The ASDF Maker Dialog Forthesimulaton select a SimulationFeature fram the TreeView create a new one or edit the currently active one Determines the range to be run through for both the polar angie and e azimuth angle and the respective delta tap se Tissus ea and analogue for The radius and the initial postion of the emitter press set to apply changes This position is independent to the array and can be
35. channel that best matches the ray s wavelength After a simulation one can navigate through this 3D UVW data by clicking the right mouse button and select the Navigate 30 UV data In the UV data view or sing one ofthe spectral operations available under Menu gt UWView Spectral Calculations When usingthe option store XYZ the light automatically Is converted thus the UDView hom inan RGB format araos tn at a Pre C mitisien Coe Please note any changes in the dialog settings have been applied a new simulation hae to be done 7 4 Candela Sensor The sensor detects the luminous intensity distribution Candela An op tical stale factor can be used for an overall scaling of the experimental Setup The result can be stored in any light data object ike LDData ot lesnate E Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials sore hae E lemenee o P seems waerme C ipepe S apeAYpde C ypeCZpie C ype CELLLMONT T l aaa ere en dil xtc carcere it panes Pee pup xum ea E m C s imetmecer C a Figure 7 12 The Candela Sensor Diog globatscale Agloal scale factor in the interval oto take a global loss into angle size The sie and resolution ofthe Candela sensor in nin Vaim i The Wrage in delta u v Thecelszein use free optical anis M checked direction and basexy parameters can be entered Internally the Infinity surface is rotated thus defining a viewing direction m
36. exit angle forthe light rays EI Geometry 4 26 Cylinder This option creates an elliptical cylinder within the given axis system The inde ellipse or circle is orientated in the xy plane aF the anis system The cylinder is extruded into the z direction The length i defined bya startandan end distance In 2 The size of the ellipse ie set by 2 adi The Cylinder may be restricted bya start angie and a sweep angle inthe local XY plane The angles are defined in degrees and are relative to the lacal pos length from to The start and end length along the local ais radi The ellipse radii of the cylinder anglerongestart sweep The start and sweep angle around the rotation z axis 42 Sphere Creates a sectioned sphere within the given axis system The size afthe sphere is set by the given radius The sphere may be sectioned by polar 0 and azimuth 6 angle sweeps Al angles are defined in degrees radius The radius ofthe sphere star sweep The start and sweep polar angle against the rotation za star sweep The start and sweep azimuth ange around the rotation zais 4 2 8 Mesh Sphere Creates a complete mesh sphere within the given anis system The size ofthe sphere the colar and the mesh density can be set with the dlalog box below This sphere can not be sectioned at creation Geometry radius Defines the sphere radius mesh density The mesh density of the surface the larger this number t
37. fles can be found in the Station folder at ucdShapelsamplesayDevatinbyLen Analysis of Geometry and LID Data vensen BR BE wewem BR E a pm ud e Ff tenataj ne F gt kaos pate eda C hcl atone val atone fom gm desert C mapa eae maano C arriba vate HE eee cechetordnane Deine uie ESSE iure 9 36 The Ray Deviation and Checkerboard Dialog viewing dimension n n range muv button calculate max box These parameters determine the position af the viewer the view and the up direction ofthe geometry Determines the number af cels in each direction Le the resolu on ofthe checkerboard grid Determines the extent ofthe checkerboard image and the ray deviation diagram in u and v diecon pressed a surrounding bax with corresponding values for the resolution is calculated radio button checkerboard pat Setsthetype ofthe pattem toeither checker horizontal or vertical board distance stipes The distance between the checkerboard and the lens tn be ex amined This value may have a positive or negative sign so the checkerboard image may be positioned at bati sides af the lens Of course to see any resulting deterioration n the patte the lens must be positioned between the checkerboard and the ob The width af the squares resp stripes in the checkerboard 3 Analysis of Geometry and LID Data gray teves The number of gray levels in the checke
38. gai The Wal Thickness Diagram dilog stu suroce The start surface forthe thickness calculation target surface The target surface for the thickness calculation ome ofthe thickness date Caption used for the generated UV data view which contains the thickness diagram numberofpointsinuv Number of points to uniformly sample the uv parameter range of the start surface The distance between the start and target sur face is computed at these grid points Figure 9 19 Example Distance between the surfaces te oad esso yasov zm ntheitenal aaar both wendy 35 Analysis of Geometry and LID Data 9 5 Benchmark test tool for TC4 45 or self defined assessments Tris toal has been implemented for assessing the photometric performance of vehicle headlights sich as road scene Ilumination and glare limitation as wellas lane guidance and the detection of pedestrians and objects A special TCipgs assessment is avaliable under Menu Analysis amp Open Benchmark CAacidshapelclassestbenchmarkorotolype 1 45 vob open Benchmark allows to open Sel defined ones The content of the Ts s not described here it is supposed to be known to the user when checking Lbs according o this assessment ELE aS Ez EE TX aen re ce sos The min Benchmark Diag With this dialog it is possible to select sample vehicles from a list box assign LiDs for etri high low beam to them choose a special position foreach amp and perfo
39. geometry view wich come fram a particular region n the light intensity distribution Thisanalysis tool enables the userto backtrack glare and otherproblems in the beam patterns ter creating the sensor one should perform a Monte Carlo ray trace To display the rays In the GeoView use the dialog Restore Rays from Ray History Sensor please alsa refer to Section 9 4 3 Restore Rays fom Ray History Senso Please see also the LucidShape demo Ray History Sensor at ht Tc jwomsbrandenbug gmbh de productsucidshape down loads demos ray history fle name The name and path ofthe ray history fle e g RayHisSen ht angle size f The size and resolution ofthe Candela sensor in Unay Una Yi nar The U range in degree delta u v The celi size in degree Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials m m mom qmm m m C ueigde benra C yee Ze e rl rim Pusat Fire 733 The Ray History Sensor Dialog 5 pe 744 Volume Sensor The volume sensor accounts rays in a three dimensional box This box is divided into single three dimensional cells so called voxels Various ac counting methods are available ter creating the sensor one should per ma Monte Carlo ray trace To display the simulation result the dialog Visualize Volume Sensor has to Be use see Section 9 4 2 Visualize Volume Sensor pulldown menu sensormode Determines the ray detection mode The flur mode c
40. gt xy mapping 4431 Create Point Creates a single point It can be selected e g to define the origin ofan anis system or to create a point doud Geometry Pointxyz The xs yoz coordinate of the point point same The points name 4442 Create Polyline Creates a polyline through a number of points sting points can be moved or deleted also new ones can be added This des not work ike drawing program raving while keep pressed but via help points point anal lin type ine width Sets the type ofthe line and the width of selected type Interactive Mouse editing View list view the polyline without interaction Sketch Move around the mouse and click for adding a new point while cick and hold down the point is moveable Selects One may select one or mote points Inserts Adds anew pont toa selectable section afthe polyline sls the old section into two new with the new point as a common poini Move Pick upa single point and change its coordinates ciosejopen Checking the ag close ries to create a closure between both the beginning and the endothe polyline not possible in the sketch moda grid mode grid size En disables the grid mode if disabled one can use freehand drawing without restrictions If enabled one can define the solu ion of the drawing gridvia size and then the points afthe poine Wil automatically be ted to that grid button snapalitogrid The coordinates fll points are approximat
41. is created This too does not work with a self created Sensor Asalready mentioned above do not change any object fram the application tel because this wil tesut n data errors E Chapter 12 Miscellaneous Menus This chapter describes mastiyin tabular forni miscellaneous menus which do not require a detailed description or which are described in detail in other LucidStudio documents 224 Custom The Custom menu can be customizedto your indvidual needs You may extent the menu interface by programming in LucidShell language and Setup the interface far your current project For example if you work on project where you have several calculation procedures foreach reflector Surface you can make menu entries for each reflector part and enter your Teflect n angles inta your home made dlalog bo 12 2 Options 22 4 Global Settings This menu entry opens a dlalog that consists of seven entries and presents Various program Settings Ike paths CAD data exchange modes ete The installation process automaticaly adjusts the respective entries consist ently to the structure created on your HDD so this usually only has ta be modied f there were made some changes Global Settings tab Paths Inthistab fourlrectris can beset where to find the respective g Folders or les namely the scripts the classes the ush oe ihis 1s not the acronym for LuriaShape and the pdl fles tab Path 2 In this tab an extern
42. is shawn in the Message View button ed amp weconfg W pressed the current configuration can be loaded saved from foj Hoo 1144 Retro Reflector This application s an example for the retro reflection in combination with test table It creates a setup with a retro reflector optic a light source and sensors The retro reflectance can be checked for different inclination angles according to ECE and SAE regulations Light from the disk emitter wil be reflected from the sample and measured with a sensor The sample material can be Inlined 3n horizontal and vertical direction The sample fle can be found within the installation at Jsamples Retroetlex retroetector us Figure ss Te Retro Reflector Sample Mode d C Eregi O A Emden Omm 1A Erit Den VAn C ECE reatar Dee VA Aei FE men Ce 8 ppm mieten EE demere P eR away E Gem Sma Seneca mars Figure 14 2 Tne Retro eec Dialog E Applications regulation andinclination In the ist three rows the user can select among diferent ECE and SAE regulations The fourth row determines the inclination angle ofthe sample h is the horizontal and v the vertical angl respectively the units are in degree amination Enen Determines the mean illumination given in i This may be any value but 22 is a common value in practice The result in the Candcla sensor is no longer real candela but ratios of mil CAE hus no scale is needed in the test able Tedus
43. m thi section 443 Parabola Creates a 3D Parabola The 3D curve lies in the XY plane of he given axis j System and has ts vertex at the anis origin The focal length andthe ange define the parabola s shape So cal length The focal length of the parabola xminmax The parabola s ange in X Geometry 4 4 2 Hyperbola Creates a 3D hyperbola It lles in the XY plane ofthe given asis system andis centered at the axis origin Two focal points define the hyperbola s shape 2 The wo focal lengths of the hyperbola x min max The hyperbola s range in x 444 Ellipse Creates 3D ellipse It ies in the XY plane af the given axis system and is centered ar the anis origin The ellipse size is set by 2 adl A sub a may be defined by an optional start and sweep angle modus The elipse radi stant sweep angle The start and sweep angles 4 4 4 Ellipse by Two Focal Points Creates a 3D ellipse t ies in the XY plane ofthe given axis system and is centered atthe anis origin The elis is set by 2 focal points Asub i arc may be defined by an optional start and sweep angie D The wo focal points of the ellipse isto sweep angle The start and sweep angles Geometry 4 5 Hell With thistoota curve inform ofa helix can be created tmay be used e g to create flament shapes in lamp modes fadus The two radiiafthe hel fusi the helix has the form afa circle otherwise it becomes ellipti
44. max range othe surface in U V direction parameter mar fom patches in UV approximation The number of patches in U V degree in ULV approximation The polynomial surface degree interpolation Uv smoothness approxima Fag which determines the type af smoothing point tangent ar tion curvature continuous Fora sketch ofthe dialog see Figure 4 5 The Dialog Surface rom Formula with sub diloge eem a NN m TREES Cru eae XII EUN mr E ur Fe E EEC E in Figure 4 The Dialog Surface pom Fri withst dalogs 5 Geometry 444 Standard Curves This section describes the commands that are available under the menu entry Curves offering the user a number of basie curve creation tole Most commands start a dialog which merely consists af three part Adio part containing entries specific for the geometry to be created like the focal length for a parabola or the radius fora circular curve These parameters are described in the table Below 2 Adialogpart controling the curves deni its coloring and its local anis system See Figure 4 6 The parabola dialog with ts nwo parts s geometric speci ic entries 2 non geomet c entries common to most af the dialogs in this section foran example The second dialog part isthe same for most commands re 4 6 Tbe parabola dialog with ts two parts faj geome spec entries on geometric entries ammon to mast of ihe diogs
45. n ex i experiments on remate computers in a lacal network Avery important point Make sure the created spooler directory canbe accessed and edited rom the network keyword writing authorization Roughly spoken the spooler can be used in three more or less different ways The most simple ay ito use the it as a local spoler an one PC The user does the setup starts the spoler and feeds it with simulations jobs The second possibility isto setup the root path in the local network so another PC can access the Jobs e g a remote controlleg one via TeamViewer or siman On both PCs the spoler points at he same directory On the remate controlled PC the spooler is started Le it waits for work jobs aT Simulation arriving in this root path ese jobs are created bythe local PC This way one can prepare simulation Jobs on a non busy PC while another PC is performing the simulations The third possibilty isto setup a real Server Client spooler Here the local PC becomes the Server and morethan one PCs are assigned as Chen rio wh Spb Spek Cr Sd Cr Codi prea Fie EY CIE feme eee arse era ens peepee eS pd pe ol pte imison oder ape Tama renate Quer Figure 85 Spooler Dialog Fora local spooler the initiation sequence and the further handling works as follows Open a file explorer and create a new spool queue roor path ar select an existi
46. ne of them surrounded by a shield a light source and a parabolic efector Aray bundle has been drawn to visualize the imaging and the vertex ofthe refiectar has obviously been placed in the center of the coordinate system The display mode was chosen presi Figure 2 The Geo View Light Screen View Thelightscreen displays flament images orray target dots during the interactive ray trace analysis see the section called Interactive Ray Trace An angular coordinate system A or B or on the plane Z at a specific position can be chosen I is a very useful tool ta ensure correct Imaging and Image orientation I also can assist e g In estimating the Impact of alterations ta your optical system before doing a complete simulation gie 3 The gh Sereen View 5 Getting started with Lucudio The light sereen shown in Figure 13 The Light Sereen View features cylindrical flament images rom four different ray bundles e Tour separate Images During the interactive ray path analysis any change in the optical setup directly affects these images according to the ray bundles you had previously defined Therefore you can immediately see the impact of your modifications Please rote tnat he Images are directly obtained rom interactive ray tracing and do show dierent sizes coreclyas a result of the actual imaging system and the path oF the traced ray bundles V Data View The UV data view offers the best support fr viewing sc
47. need for luminance calculation can be satisfied by the choice af the road sensor type Usually the illumination incident on the raad Qux is of primary interest The luminance from the road however can also be calculated cen bre C Enol C amo owna mit etna C nac RAL ter RAL ea mn e Figure id Sreet Muination Dialog El The standard luminance sensor sis tin Perfect lamberian reflectance difiusely reflecting road luminance Rm Mainly diffuse road surface but of rather high albedo e g con ke Diffuse specular mixed darker appearance eg rough new as phat D Slight specular darker asphalt e g old asphalt with wor off roughness D Ratherspeclr roaditypeofsmooth surface e very fine texture spectator position Determines the coordinates fram which the light shal be ab served This has ta be set carefully because the viewing is ony alld if looking from the driver view L on he driving lane Applications Upon selection o another road type R the partial BRDF of this specific asphalt is also shown in a separate uv data Remember these are based on measurements and show the dependence of the polarangle ofincidence onto paint on the roadand e lateral angle towards the driver postion p radas kwarto FE p metis cmm E su oath ps FF anse E eee son a mE senem n OE E smeden C Figure 1217 Stet Mamiration istog 1 light point height The heig
48. offset radio button dotmask polarity settings Pag export dot position and sieto fle boundary setings 4 offsets boundary setings trim curve offset Opens the pop up dialog to select an already existing surface alternatively a test plane canbe used Hs surface Is the base Surface the dots wil be placed onto This test plane ls a plain rectangular surface Tora 2D dot modeling a physical depth has to be specified The values should be significantly lower han mm The respective description shown directly below the choices 1 checked with pressing apply the complete dot setup is saved into the specified fle make sure to have witing permission in this folden Sets the boundaries of the surface area covered by the dotmask settings of o zero wil make use ofthe ful surface area Specify here the distance to be kept from the four surface boundaries tua Furthermore this option can be used to create a Specially limited segment for the use of multiple dotmask in Stance on the same base surface Specifies the boundaries in case of using a immed surface as the base surface From Geometries Menu Selection pp ni Cows tft VL an POR Cer cenam OI a Cis ce 8 soci von oti tre od comes etd rast rta x EI imas Clavie Cieero i Lm ue 46 The remaining Ports ofthe Dalmas Dialog radio button radius Determines the radius variation of the single dats whether they a
49. only one ha ofthe center is created e g as a tailpiece or an extruded cete 5 9 Prismband for Lightguides The prism band function allows you to create a disturbance in 1D light guides light pipes You can use triangular shapes prisms or rounded esto carve Into the backside of ight gue creating light spread to Wards the front side of the light guide Tne spine curve of height guide is used to create the prism band along this spine curve The out coupling efficiency is controlled by the distance between individual prisms and Their geometric size relate to the light gulde tel Amore detailed description about the options parameters and the base setup can e found in a separate whitepaper available at our website t tp fwrw brandenburg gmbh de products lucidshape down loads whitepapers p reform Geometries Menu Selection Basically the PrsmBand dialog allows you to create identical varying or individual prisms along the base curve Therefore all prism parameters can De defined as constant values const as a lt of equally spaced contrat curve values or as individual values for each prism wman amau fma oma C ditd dae A nar suem mt C oe C idi wante ES wina BS Ins AUR sian sime fm Cane Cia Cem ane C nsa RR TTE Figure 5 32 The upper part of the Prism band Feature Dialog radio button prism delta and The delta is t
50. or approximation The dialogs consist merely of three parts Non geometric properties tike curve name and curve color 2 Reading the point data fom a fle This oniy requires the Input of a path and fle name 3 Setting interpolation approximation parameters Ike polynomial degree number of polynomial arcs etc See Figure 43 Curve interpolation approximation parameters The following table describes the interpolation approsimation parameters approximation Zinterpolation Defines whether the curve will be approximated or interpolated IE degree The polynomial curve degree ars The number afares to be calculated used only for the approxim ation method smoothing factor factor controlling an estra glabal smoothing Used oniy for the appronination method smoothness selector for the smoothing ag point tangent or curvature Used aniy far the approximation method vs Geometry piri mation mti Dmm Pouce 4 39 Curve nterpolationdanpronimatior parameters 474 Read Point Row Reads a PointRow data object from a fle The fle must have xy co ordinates or xy coordinates in case ofis2D n one line Between the three or two numbers there may be any alphanumeric text which Wil be skipped when reading the fle Example of a PaintRaw data fle i E switched on the paint row es in the plane with o Select pont row fle Enter the name ofthe fle which contains the paint row data
51. other parameters and press Sa to start the sim ulation Iavailable on your system make sure that Multiprocessing is activated After the simulation has finished watch the progress bar in the status line at the bottom of the window two light data views are visible ane far each sensor A lux sensor data view is also shown in Figure 5 UV Data View lux sensor left picture and cd sensor ight both un Tiered Getting started with Luctudia Sisi esee erii z md cn 8 arsr elnos fara Milieu poo T komsetresbunaes T adonde xU T tais peque Fiure 134 Roy Trace Dialog 5 In case you have closed a ight data view choose AII UV gh Data Views either ftom the content menu press RMB or from the Menu Window AI UV Light Data Views or you can sressthetootarion EB to recreate t Now oneview shows the lamination data ix sensor let in front ofthe reflector and the second view contains the luminousintensity distribution n Candela candela sensor You may smooth the view by filtering press ane of the tool bar icons a a Fiter it a few times unt the view is sufficiently smooth 5 Alternatively to obtain a smoother image you may want to restart the simulation with a larger number af rays 10000 tace to get 20 000 000 rays simulated 6 You also shouid lonkat the message window ight lower part ofthe screen where certain actions are logged and the tatal ight Ru
52. rand Bare measured against this vector Fara sketch of the angle calculation please referto the whitepaper mentioned at the beginning of this subsection i Freeform Geometries Menu Selection FE FE ees Fm DF tiene Cum C pangira Cowen Fore on brane cer 0 eere poe igen vecer htt IU 1 tae Qa Que serae mra e 5 34 The ower part ofthe Pim ord Feoture Dio stot gop end gap fog with ends transation fag radion tip and groove radio button profile type Speciisthe length before the fis sta or after the tast prism end ta adjust or shift the band to the actual length ofthe used spine curve checked a connecting surface between the last prism and the end of the spine curve is created hits the starting point af the prism band relative to the glabal axes This is used for example to move the prism band to the back fa light pipe the center spine curve was used checked one can replace the sharp edges ofthe prisms with Curved surfaces with the respective radi Switches between Nat wedges of triangular cass section orares to create rounded instances with the specified alpha and beta angles NURBS curve of degree a The oniy diference between the two prism typesis the calculation ofthe start point far the next prism Using prism planar the start Point far the nest prism is taken without any modification the Tarresponding gaps just connecting the end ofthe previo
53. section we try to give an introduction in the use af ray fles concerning a simulation in Lucishape There are two alternatives to obtain a ray fle either by download from he homepage afthe LED supplier or to record it direct in LicldShape ora description af hawto create an own Tay fle please refer to Section 742 Ray Fle Sensor When performing a simulation using the ray fe emitter type s a much better choice than using e g lambentan emitter A ray fle contains all informations of the emitter e s in case ofa LED it contains the whole geometry of the chip the coating and any opties ke lenses in contrast tothe other emitter types the fux ofa ray fle emitter cannot be set directiy in the dialog because tis saved in the ray e Sometimes it might be necessary to alter the fux the ray le s ux does not match the Nux required in the simulation LucidShape provides tools to analyse and modi ray fles Among other there are Check Ray File examines the ray fle and states the fux and the numberof rays stored and Copy Roy File can be used to alter the R xand the number of ays Both tol willbe explained in the following su sections 6 6 1 The use ofa RayFlle The Informations stored in a ray fle consist of single rays For each ray there are the origin the lection and the flux Optional data would be spectral formations In a simulation the stored Tays are reproduced and traced through the geometry Because allinformations about therays a
54. selected sensar type on both lanes the results are shown in the MessageView classify DIN Runsthe simulation again and calculates test data foriuminaton and luminance Tl and SR using a DIN accordant scene with some aed parameters compare Inot doneuntiinow classy is executed Aer that this DIN test is compared to the current settings the results are shown inthe MessageView again hol Ertemallyopens this chapter ofthe manual driver view Changes the paint afviewin the geometry window the position ora driver ontheright lane and atthe beginning ofthe road area omen Changes the point of view in the geometry window toa position somabove the road and with the viewing angle sightly tited down pedestron s view Changes the point of view in the geometry window to that ofa pedestrian at a position above the lef side ineat 1 5 min height bird s eye view Changes the point af view in the geometry window to a position far above the road viewing down The street illumination application offers two testing functions you can initiate them using the buttons Test Now ar Classify With only ane click the testresultsare presented in the Message View Test Now Remember oh this function the apply button after changing some parameters before you use E Applications The Test Now function calculates test quantities from the last updated simulation results The obtained values are those of average min max overall
55. src umi co peta oe stores reram rener canen Figure 738 The Luminance Comer Diog 1 After selecting an entry via the drop down menu the respective camera can be renamed fog update geo view aferse Check uncheck tnis Nag to update not update the GeoView lecting a new camera button set Applies the name the position and the model data onto the model button add Adds a new camera with the current settings and parameters to the model button copy The camera parameters for a panorama have to be entered only nce Pressing this button wili copy all parameters of the current camera to all positions button add panorama Creates alist of camera postions which form an angular scan a panorama This llus the rapid preparation fmi poen Juminance images button remove all cameras Removes a single ar all cameras from the ist EE Pees GN nw 2 SEI edens B ER mn adm mua B E n mt coma DO Figure 739 The Luminance Camera Dolo i 3 Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials coordinate system looking at view direction up direction comera distance Defines whether a cartesian ora pole coordinate system gamma tau isused Defines the position ya in the experiment to aimn the camera Defines rom which direction the Took ar position will be ob sened Defines the vertical axis to complete the orientation af the cam era s coordinate system Defines the distance between the camera more p
56. switch board are set to ini inie inthe GeoView pressed the current settings are applied onto the model Determines the number af columns in the table Le the number of sets the features con be grouped into pressed tne number of columns are updated and the names of the features are adopted from the model Using these tmo flags one can determine which shall be dane with an inactive feature e a feature which is not in an active se It pressed the feature dialog will open up If pressed the feature is removed fram the list hut not from the model These checkchosesare sed to determine which set shall be set as active Please note that ony one set per time can be setas po EI Freeform Geometries Menu Selection 54 PCS Reflector Lens Surface This FF geometry creates an Paly Curve System from specified base curves Per default these are faur curves named West North East and South The PCS can be used to create eithera reflector ora lens it allows you to define the number of facets and thelr individual spread Like all PCS systems the main cuves are defined by their origin angles orientation within the local y plane start points and the length af each section profile ofeach curve The shape ofthe component in between these curves is defined y the weights NURBS Fora more detailed description please also refer tothe separate manual ProceduraSureceAoolc ations pdf accessible via either the help menu ar inthe doc
57. tens The total radius ofthe toroidal ens s the inner or outer radius plus the focis radius ring height The height af the torus symmetric lens Pot prism Check to create fiat prisms instead of profiled curves for the ele ments A at prism has the polynomial degree of Pix side surface Check to create a bottom side with the entered thickness profile dena R The gap delta between the profile ares number of rings The number ofrings thickness The wali thickness between flat side and optie polynomial degree The polynomial degree af the lens light target The target type Farfieid the outgoing rays leave the ens towards the direction ofthe given target angles E Geometry target ongles target positions target plane vitun R postions Vitus plane fresnel i 1 water C eumdem oma mnie Near fl theoutgoingrays eave the lens toward the entered position on the target plane Virtual near field he rays leave the lens asi coming fom Str point on the vitual plane The ray output angles fa far feld is used any numb The desired ray output position radii on the target plane fa near field is used any number The position af the target plane in z direction The ray output position radi on the virtual plane fa virtual near feld is used any number The position in z direction of the virtual lane Switch to Fresnel refraction witerslndendtbre C nons C tument hes ut dann cie oma teh
58. the commands n this menu you can determine he object selection mode of the GeoView The active selection refers to the treatment of abjects by double mouse clicks You can also switch Via hat keys between the three modes see Section 123 Mouse Interaction Geometry Selection Mode Switches to the geometry selection mode which restricts the se a lecable objects to pure geometric objects surfaces cumes Shape Selection Mode Switches to the geometry selection mode which restricts the se lectable objects to shapes Pivot Point Selection Mode Switches to the geometry selection mode which restricts the se lectable objects to pivot paints 3D navigation reference points mist le on a surface 3 13 Viewing Perspectives main views Align the viewing axis to display the model in one ofthe main Views OXY Y X DX Y or V 20 mode Enables or disables the 2D view mode which restricts panning the geometry inside a plane perspecive orthogonal view Togsles between perspective and orthogonal view w Views 3 44 Clear tear selection Removes ali selections from the curent geometry clear ay paths Deletes all ray paths from the geometry view Pops up a dialog to set the display othe stock scene the dis played main axis system The anis system s blocks can alsa be Scale by powers of o See Figure 3 2 The Stock Scene Dialog and the related table aap aap F rcnt gie o The Stock Scene Dialog ris pan
59. the display types of scene ines avaliable are Mo Stene Lines Scene Lines ECE Right Hand Traffic Scene Lines ECE Left Hand Traffic Scene Lines Driver Scene Lines 20m View Scene Lines Birds Eye Operations on the Data Performs a smoothing ofthe uv data with a basic algorithm Performs asmaothing ofthe uv data with an advanced algorithm advanced smoothing dialog Opens a sub dalog to adjust parameters for the advanced erations Piter weight edge smoothing smoothing algorithm se picture right below The smoothing algorithm performs several iterations onthe given vata Mare iterations take longer but usually lead to better results Weight af the smoothing term greater than o Greater values in the fiter weight eid yield in an increased use ofthe bas fering algorithm in the advanced fitering of the UV data So fiter weight isthe weight o the basic filtering algorithm to be used inthe advanced filtering The value ofthe smoothing ofthe edges ofthe beam pattem The higher the value the less sharp edges wil remain Le softening athe cutar iese E nave HIE emstes FT p Jen Figure 3 0 he Advanced Smoothing Dialog w Views Gradients gradient radienty gradient FAVSS 08 convert convertto X pole convento Y pole convert to Zpole U range Vrange veta button curent zoom Shows the distributions gradient in u direction Shows the distributions gradient in v direction Show
60. the incoming and outgoing ray respectively is the angle between v and yar and O is the rotation of Vau around v The Henyey Greenstein volume scattering function is defined as ren aa Ip agona a probability density describing the cosvalues af the scattered ray with respect to the Incoming ray After a ray is scattered towards a new direction determined by the cos amp value the scattered ray will be rotated around the incoming ay by o where the rotation by os equally dis buted 73 Ideal Mirror Reflective simple mirror defined only by the perfect specular reflectance de seribed above EI Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials 732 Ideal Lens Refractive An ideal refractive material defines the specular reaction of light at the transition between two media of diferent erative nde 733 Lambertian Reflective and Refractive Lambertian reflective materials in LucidShape reflect the light diffusely father than specular A Lambertian surface elect the ight with a cosine distribution where the cosine maximum is achieved along the direction ofthe surface normal not along the direction of specular treatment of Teflc on isis diferent in th Gaussian Model where the outgoing Tay obeying the law of reflection is marking the center af the scattered light distribution Ustaly this typeof behaviours faund oniy on strongly diffusve materials such as paper or rough surfaces with strong aspect rat
61. the optical axis he z axis Small draft angles surface normals neariy perpen dicular to the optical re shouid be avoided Light switches to light display mode sensor surfaces show their ght distribution TextureLight switches to texture light mode Texture light displays the texture and additionally the light distribution f there is ight stored in the sensor It cross fades the light and the texture Ray Analysis Properties The Ray Analysis Properties option pops up a dialog to set the interactive ray trace properties See he picture and the related table right below ray startposition ray bundle start X Y Z Defines tne start point ofthe ray bundles for random rays and interactive ray trace shithotete The start position X Y Z may be shifted rotated from its current point by ine entered detta valuein the extemal dialog bor depth for 2D ace If checked the value defines he depth of he rays used for interactive ray trace inthe 2D geometry ven start refraction index The star refraction index far the rays grid on touch surface number ofrays in uw Upper bound forthe number of surface intersections far a grid af rays CTRL RMB offset to border Rays ofthe interactive ray trace willtar fom he surface border edge ofthe surface extent in U and V by the offset provided ray trace evel recursion Upper bound forthe number of surtace intersections fora single ray intensity Rays with intensities b
62. uniformity and longitudinal uniformity The selected luminance sensor type i shown n the MeseageView decl above the results 0 remind you ofthis important parameter Ts funcion can be applied with ali sensor types available in the street lumination application also the different luminance types uses the full toad width ofthe test eld for lamination sensor data but only a reduced est eld ight lane only for the luminance values The Sand TI are nt accessible by the test function Figure 1219 MessageView display after erecting the Testo function The Classify function runs separate simulations without a graphie representation These make use of the street parameters yau have defined but ignore the number of streetlights Their number is setto six n case ofa one sided pole pattern one light in ront of the test Teld wo Ranking and three behind it This configuration satisfies or exceeds the incorporation af neighboring gts rom ssi to 12xMH alang the road far mast common mounting heights e g Tor calculation of eni gue 1 20 Messagevien display aer executing e os unco ihe last ne shows the MF eflect The important quantities of roadway lighting ar listed bey inthe following table along withthe importan details of their numerical implementation Minimum and maximum values of an illuminance or luminance respectively Average value ofthe luminance E averaged over all test points wiih test el is
63. updated dynamical depending on the type of view in focus So anly one of the view menus is available at a time The specific commands are available within the corresponding view menu while a window foreach pe of view can be opened manually via tne menu fem Window The GeoView shows the complete geometry af the experiment Ina variety of diferent graphical representations you can freely rotate the optical system In 3D and you can select each shape Tor design purposes The anis xy are always displayed to allow a quick orientation within the setup they can be switched off manualy see below The TreeViewpresentsthe mast compact overview on your experiment at any stage of yout work so yau can access a dialog window for each element either simply right lick or double left lick onto an entry in the TreeView The menu offers mainly selection tools and accese to properes Sf the tree itself or elements vou selected The isting in the TreeView s structured every entry belongs to a main group like es light sources or sensore These main folders and thelr sub folders toa can be expanded or collapsed to enhance the clarity very similar to a fle ex Pioren The Tex ScriptVew is the most fundamental view yet probably the most dificult to use The Text SeriptView allows you to directly edit the properties ofall elements by editing in clear text Main features ofits menu are the update and execute commands The UVDataView g
64. view used n the lumin ance camera Please see also the buttons below In this table button from set view Pressing these two buttons allow to directly exchange the camera parameters with the GeoView At Brst one should modify the EI Simulation GeoView postin direction size untitit shows more or less the wanted picture Next press from view do some adjustments in the dialog apply these settings onto the model by pressing set view and inal press apply to create the luminance image button set values Applies thevaluestothe model but does not create the luminance image insertinto model pressed ts feature is added to the modet and shown in the TreeView This entry can be used to open the edt dialog or to delete this feature 8 7 Various Commands 374 Random Rays Creates random rays and displays them in the geometry vien NA 8 7 2 Interrupt Stops the actual running ray trace independent of the simulation type lke LighiMapping Manteca or GP tace This interrupt is not applicabile for simulations that run in external pro cesses Le spooler simulations En Chapter 9 Analysis of Geometry and LID Data The tools in this chapter may be found under Analysis for the 3D oriented tools and DVAnaysis forthe UV data oriented tools Please Remember According to the type of view in focus the menu names in LucidStudio will automatically adopt to the appropriate view 94 LID Mea
65. wall position with the light source at eo Splits the 3D spectral data frames into all af the 2D slices that make up the 3D UV Data Plt toggie BRDF relative to specular Ifyou have BRDF as UV data lom a fle conversion you can direction Spectral Calculations sum specum convert to calor human eye vision image color data analysis toggie whether ornat you wantitorented inthe specular direction othe material Adds the individual UV data in a spectral simulation The result is displayed in the data view this also disables the Navigate 3D LNW Data option See Navigate 30 40 UVW UVWT Data Opens anew dialog which allows to covert the cunentiyselected Lb into a colored D There are four conversions selectable Screen RGB SRGB CIE 1932 xy and color temperature Please see the sub section below Opens a new window which states several colar informations about the DView Ike the CIE diagram the color spaces the SPD tc The currently selected position sensor ce can be altered Via keeping the left mouse button pressed and moving the mouse EI Views over the LID Pressing convert wil convert he values fom the Current selected choice into the other three ones specum as RGB Opens a new window that displays the ven s curent spectrum 2an RGB bitmap This apples only for 3D data st e resulte of spectral simulations Human Eye Vision Image HEV The HEV Tone Mapping is a tootin LucdShape to modify image
66. 20 there are calculated photometric quantities defined as figures of performance Please note that these regulations difer between countries af the European Union as there is no common intemational agreement on the selection of llumination classes For example the English 13201 2 E equals the German 13201 3 D For measuringthese quantities on a street typically atest field between two streetlights ls defined tie Mied with a number oftest points In rows Telr number is 3 across the road and 30 along the road Tbe exact test geometry can be found in DIN EN 19201 2 E 7 1 LucidLite applies the very Same test point distribution to comply with the regulations and provide simulations as clase as possible to measurements in the street ze Applications Sg seme tantos tow tortis Teen Ges Ca FT Deer amen Pet Ve Bie Vi Figure 138 Street Namination Dog 009 poly Applies the setting to the model both the street view andthe measured LID are automatically redrawn scene Opens a smal dialog here some graphical elements may be shown or blind out independently ta each other he test eld lines the sidewalk and the test poit The test parameters can be selected among DIN Deutsches institut fr Normung e V IES luminating Engineering Society of North America and fl sensor data saveood config Acus to save oad the curent settings into cle testnow Aopliesthe tests on the data obtained fromthe curent sceneand the
67. 42 Create Fitting Curve Fts a curve through a PointRow data object preferably read from a le The curve may beither approximated or interpolated through the points in case of interpolation normals at each point may be used represented byanather 3 numbers on each line point row The point row from which the fitting cuve should be created reod point row Reads a point row froma fle See Section 4 7 3 Read Point i Row Geomety mte Dmm Fue 1 Th Create Fitting Curve dialog 473 Read Value Row Reads a ValueRow data abject from a data le consisting oy coordin atesin one ine he coordinates separated bya comma Example fora ValueRow data objects 4 Select value row fle Enter the name ofthe e which contains the value row data A4 Create Explicit Curve Creates anexpe curve which has he explicit mathematical frm y andis stared eral as a NURBS cv The cuve s defied bya alu data object of length nu cnssngofa vector nu U para meters and a vector with nu Y values The sequence of he U parameters m mast be na constantly increasing or decreasing ade The NURBS data is calculated during the object construction by an inter polation or approximation algorithm value row The value row fom which the explicit curve s created read value row Reads avalue row rom ale seealso Section 47 Read Value Row local avs system The local anis system ofthe cune Referto the descri
68. 6 7 Elliptic Lens Creates an elliptical lens The lens consists ofan elliptical outer side and aspherical inner side The local axis system isthe local coordinate system the lens Those rays which start fom the center af this axis system lese the lens parallel The lens may either be created as a rotational lens with a given diameter anga start and sweep angle 35 an extruded lens with a given width and start and end length aras a torold tens with a radius height and a start and sweep angle Geomety The available options and parameters depend on the currently selected lens type vertex length The vertex point ofthe lens on the z axis af the local coordinate system diameter The diameter of the rotational lens stat angle seep angie Thestart and sweep angle of the rotational and toroidal ens Pasie surface Enables disables the creation of a fa side of the lens vertex width The with of the extruded lens start length endlength Thestartand end length of the extruded lens radius height The ads and height ofthe toroidal iens focus radius The focus radius of the toroidal lens pr Bow Ww B P ster nbi cung drat get mom icem gue 4 7 The Elie Lens dialog 4 68 Hyperbolic Lens Creates a hyperbolic lens The lens consists ofa hyperbolic ner and a fat outer side The lacat axis systern is the lacal coordinate system a the lens Those rays which start fram the center ofthis axis syst
69. A light is classified to be of Ven Short Medium or Large range ifthe point af maximum intensity cd lies within the according ange along the road As a result af plotting the UVData in the Steet Luminaire Diagram the definition of the roadway luminaire class from the five types IV and V is done t characterizes the transverse with ofthe light distribution across the road onthe street side For his classification the half maximum ointensty aces oniy considered within tne longitudinal range the ight S M D as discussed above The types are bey characterized below Type Half maximum candela iso ine positon other symmetry Type Between 1x MH LRL on hous side and 1x MH LRL on street side Typen On street side partly or entirely between x MH LRL and 175 MH LRL but nat beyond Typem On Street side partiy or entirely between 175 x MH LRL and 2 75 XMHLRL but nat beyond Type On street side partly or entirely beyond 225 x MH LRL Typev Symmetry circular variance against z axis rotation 3 4 4 Background Colors The commands in this section open a Windows color selection dialog to select the desired back ground color This dlalog automaticaly closes after applying the chasen colar by clicking ok set background color Sets the background color of the view in focus set default backgroundcolor Sets the default background colar fores Any change will Tistcomeint effect when opening tne next uv view twil neither affect the v
70. Ca C Coeficients for the aspherical formula By default these values are setto o lens radius Tre radius determines the base size of th lens add closing disc Enabls dlsable the creation ofa closure of the lens discretization points The number of discretization points for the lens curve approxim anon tars The number of arcs for the ens geometry polynomial degree The polynomial degree af the profile curves recommended r CM e Cl s eC RIPE onte omora T Aaa uem f eae um Ram pani deee E E re 4 2 The Aspherical Lens Per Formule dialog 4 63 Free Form Fresnel Lens Creates a Fresnellens with ideal free form curved rings orflat elements alternatively The shape consists afa Nat cone surface on one side and a Totational surface with The retraction index anc aree form refraction curve ring on the other side d absorption coeficient may be set diferent fr the inner lens and outer medium The Fresnel Nag of the Refractor objet may be set o or d The on diferent heights hi ound disk If the inner center and the outer rim ofthe lens can also be is way the fat side may bea cone instead ofa flat diameter is greater zero the lens has an inner EI Geometry hate in this case a hole surface is created as well The lens divided into Nequal sized rings The lens focal point ies in the origin ofthe given anis system The optical direction is the z axis The len
71. IDs in one line ihe same as in point row Between the three or two numbers there may be any alphanumeric teat This tert will be Frleesperteleis i E checked the point grid lies in the xy plane mum The length ofthe u and v parameter array Select point grid fle See Section 4 85 Comman Dialog Part 4 8 7 Create Point Grid Creates a paint grid with n by m points in L and Vin a pateh t 2 5394 d Geomety mumberofpeiisinuy The number ot points in Uand V direction ange min max min max The parameter range in u and direction the fourcamerpointsofthe The xy coordinates ofthe four comer paints ofthe patch patch select point grid ispley color See Section 48 a Common Dialog Parte ol ree Fw fw uw ow per ER E B mmm mm REEL B mms mm aaa Puce 2 The Cece Point Gri dialog 4 8 8 Extrapolate Point Grid strapolates a point gid selection point grid The point grid to be extrapolated extrapolation method Specyherethe extrapolation direction Options are inu direction Invtection orin both directions E Geometry 4 8 9 Sample Point Grid from Target Scene Creates new point grid by sampling over surfaces The toot uses al paints in the start pridas start points and shoots rays into the target scene n orderto get anew point and normal The way this is done is controlled with the sample method fag use sample surfaces Aselectorwhetherto use al
72. Measured data always contain the power ar intensity distribution of amp not the lumination only dta light source is covered nearly far one ith of space by an absorbing shield e g like the Hy automotive headlamp low beam and delivers sooo lumen the efficacy factor is calculated as 3 01 loss 4 25 So in this case the bare lumination wouid nave to produce abaut 1250 im in order 10 achieve the measured output Make sure thatthe simulated ight sources within LucidStudio behave like certain real light sources that have been measured If you create an emitter shape in LucdStudo til differs hom te counterpart in real ife just Uike a mathematically perfert lambertian cylinder source always will differ rom a veal amp with a socket connects housing shields shading wires In con Sequence an arbitrary 300 im lamp wili not equal an arbitrary 300 m emitter shape Therefore you would have to use the emitter shape and a mare or less realistic CAD model of tne real ght Source the lamp because the total lux can be strongly reduced by the actual geometry ofa lament housing or an absorbing front cap and such is e before being affected by the rest of your optical setup Uke mirrors or lenses For example an emitter coil of Lambertian type in LucidStudio i a good representation of the tungsten cail ofa realhalogen lamp However Tor certain setups especially some automotive ones you may need a light source simulation that is an even more
73. NUBE foe Fare y The Couey Faction Dialog Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials Cauchy coefients ARC The experimentally determined coeficients for the Cauchy equation Gauss Emission Function AGaussemisslon function scaled in such away that its slope is controlled Via the FWHM vale lul width at half maximum AN 10 EE Ga tamme Figure 7 29 The Goss Emission Function Dialog peak o The location athe peak has to be lacated inside the wavelength range Fullwidth at half maximum w Specifies the width af the control curve FWHM is the distance between the two pains where the curve is dow to half of s Fit Spectral Curve from Values This dialogis used to generate spectral distributions from aistafspectal Values given by the user Depending on the selected type of curve emis Sion refraction absorption or transmission typical inta values are Supplied The transmission curves take further parameters into account Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials pulldown menu curve type Determines the basic setup of heft curve available choices are emission Tefection dispersion absorption coefficient absorption coefficient om inner transmission no fresnel absorption coefficient from transmission ndl fresnel Depending on this choice the function valve row wil be preset bythe progam funcion value row The intensity values within the lamb r
74. PajW major Papi major Pz jM minor P27 minor Hat zt up RSW RSW up RSW U Shape RV U Shape aol RoW up Rao U Shape fc U Shape WoW WW up WoW WW up VAM We up Wax Wasi p s DRL Hep Hs Qia Creates a ight souree for sky light simulation This is useful in the head mu EE IU ME onthe headlamps reflective surfaces ar optics in orderto prevent melting ging damaged eg cover lens front glass etc The properties afthe skylight source are determined bythe geographical s o aae aa 72 S Lethe localtime hour and time zone meridian You can choose between two models af the sky light source First there s the sun disc model wich represents the sun 2D angular width af o 53 deg Second there isthe clear sky model which features a clear blue sky without direct contribution from the sun disc Bath are CIE models thst are well nown n literature on solar lighting Light Sources OR timeo P M mel am ven ven pa ane T Me I me nire RI win F pd Med aed ts iure os The Shy Light Source Dialog zenith oxisxyz The ight sources zenith direction This defines the vertical axis ofthe light source model pointing up into the sko It may difer from o if your system is ted e g tne headlamp ofa car located on a side horizon axis xyz The light source s horizon direction Defines the ateral orientation af your axis system I estis along 0 1 0 north will be 0 0
75. Point Grid s12 Create Skinned Surface 16 Create Surface fom Paint Cloud ss Estrapalat Pont Grid 113 Point Grid on Surface us Read Paint Cloud 109 Read Paint Grid 112 Read Value Grid is Sample Point Cloud 110 Sample Pint Grid rom Target Scene 114 Assign Material 187 Ais System i B SDF 296 BSDF Data 227 SDF Wizard 224 c 52 Clipping Plane 120 cole calor spaces 52 Convert to NURBS 73 Create Material 187 Cime Approximation 105 Compound Parabolic Concentrator CPO 88 Elipse 57 Elipse Fto F 87 from Formula 88 fom NURBS surface border o trom Trimmed Surface Border 90 Hels a8 Hyperbola 87 Interpolation sos Standard Cures B6 finde 79 from Rays 121 D Design Feature Manager 130 Document Edi Operations 3 E Edit chapter 3 Edit operations 37 Efficacy scale factor 3 levate degree of NURBS cuve 74 levate degree of NURBS surface 74 Ellipse 37 miter tract Surfaces 74 F FF Geometry PCS reflector jlens surface 332 Fle chapten 33 File Operations 31 6 Geo Vien 14 Geomety t H Hel 88 Henyey Greensteln Volume Scattering model 198 Human Eye Vision Image HEVI 52 HMHM 165 395 Hyperboa ij Hyperbolid 77 1 Interactive Ray race 20 invert axis on NURBS surface 74 L Lene Aspherical 96 Aspherical per formula 97 Elliptic 03 Free form Variable Fresnel o Fresnel Hyperbolic 104 Potato Chip Lens Outer Optic Inner Opt 102 Spheric 105 Total intern
76. Reverse Sensor Light The light in the sensor Is projected back into a virtual ight so the reverse sensor light lsa LID which would be needed t iluminate a scene resulting in identical ight distri tons in al sensors One can switch between curve light fog and low beam light The sample le can be found within the installation at samples automotvlightng veverseightlus amei C Raigi C lorem Ue iieri edge rofa oaaae Coria edo he M m a a tony BOB Rum carent BOR Bog mm Pres j m nen nete eset gare si The iol Beam Pater Dialog Please note Not all aF the below described parameters are available for all three beam types sensorstrendongle Defines the size af the sensor via the start and end angle innerjouter rodius Defines both the inner and outer radius ofthe sensor alpha Sets the width ofthe low beam sensor for the asymmetric finger constanttux stantfend angle Presets the lux sensor with a constant value Start and end angle determine the angle range af this offset Applications Vital ght source position xy The position ofthe virtual light source Le the mounting positon ofthe real emitter later orientation tit or Thetitandtherotation angles Le the horizontal and the vertical UD Vew Range Defines the UV ange ofthe LID via the four parameters unin Ua radio button Pole Sets the angular ype of beam pattern epale Type B y pole TypeA Try bath types and see the diferent shapes oft
77. The ight i spread in a range from fist value to second value n case at a zero spread a collimator wil be created which emits patalel ight focal point ide centerentry inmost cases these values are identical with the focal point for the font center entry virtual focal point side center The curved side entry lumirates the intemal reflector a second ent virtual focal point s created whichis effectively seen by the re fector ag on Determines whether the colimator shall contain a reflector e g this can be used to dothe settings for the center frst while having the reflector faded out refector spreod The values entered here determine the spread angles for the reflector par wie ton oe he C manitecene C ipee perpe Lom Fc pm pom factam Time Hace Deme pom memini ornoa Poe e tai crema emittens fe BO pon fe hp Bs Figure 5 29 Te LED Colimator Dialog tab for other parameters w From Geometries Menu Selection radio button front shape You can select the tront shape eit aperture of the colimator nothing to use other optics such as plowed ens at standard couple cone s for be coupling with specified radi bin le mainly to save material a frustum ota cones ur ut ofthe front shape the angle always is oriented towards fhe centre ne of the colimator radio button ight target defini Toggles between fer Field and nea Feld witha given distance to t
78. UWView The sensor cells in LucidShape are rectangular the dots n the regulatian are circular Internal the size of the sensor celts is adjusted so they have the same size as the dots Figure 7 21 The License Plate Sensor Dilog ES miter tor and Sensor Materials license plate type This offers one to choose from a variety of dierent legal regula tions vectorjongle defined This fag determines the type of the anis system origi Defines the coordinates ofthe origin anise Defines the coordinates of the x and the zane respectively rotation angles about Z Y5 X Defines the rotation about the axis in this given order after rota tion about the zs the y axis 1s transformed y gt Y s This paragraph shorty describes the setup of a license plate sensor anto an imported surface achieved irom a CAD program Ater importing the geometry there are among other a sensor area Shown as blue in the picture just below the cens plate red in two parts with a mounting hole n each segment and two cylindrical light sources yellow Figure 7 22 Snpiied Geometry The lense plate aree e io two parts gH one marked in orange the Sensor area and two nora ight sources eine Open the dialog via Meri Sensor License Plate Sensor and select the right test table Click onto anis and double click anta the license plate surface If there ls an anis system attached to Bis surface s taken to the select axis Maybe the o
79. Views a KC mr ge ewe 5 Bewe es ine Oed Ree etiim ts howe 77 Em eT si Qin niin og single source souce ij Pag minor sst end radio button LiDData Pag with UV angle tnes radio button source left right length from to right left ll anination ype button Insert into model Figure 3 17 The ns Eye View Dialog Altus to use either ane ortwo light sources Determines the position of the respective light source using the above explained coordinate sytem In case of using two lig t sources ane them can be mirrored by activating the respective fiag the other LID will be ignored The LID to be used can be either an UWiewin focus a LID stored in the TreeView or a LID saved as a fle rom left to right activated one can display UV angle lines inthe generated view These angle Ines can be displayed either for the teft or the right Determines the size ofthe road via yo Xar determines the road with via gs and Yin The cell size ofthe generated view Allows the user to select between six diferent types of lumina tion types such as normal horizontal radial no use afa cosine factor vertical half spherical cylindrical and half yindrcal pressed the feature Is added to the TreeView Le It becomes a part ofthe model E Views Generates a street luminaire diagram forIES classification This polar diagram helps to classify roadway and ateallumination fatures poles
80. Window Tree View or the TreeView con rom the toti E EO imera arar p Bryne nig See E Liberte Cine i Serer CE EL Figure ii The Tre View wit newiy add Ligh nuce Our light source appears as an emitting shape denoted VPT Sufaceigh Following the tee hierarchy we also find the VPT CyinderSuface and LambertEmiter properties You may rotate the model by pressing the LMB and simultaneously move the mouse inside the 3D geometry window This view f called Geo view The cylinder light source s drawn nthe specie olor not changed yellow Tochangethe size andzoomin or out press SHIFT and theLMBsimultaneouslin upper Increase or tamer decrease direction To mave the model inside the 3D geometry window without rotating press the LMB and RMB sim ultanesusly and move the mouse around while keeping pressed 2 33 Define a Reflector Surface Mow we want to define the reflector surface a rectangular paraboloid From the menu select Geometry Create Surface Shape Rectangular Parabool A dialog bax opens with several sections to specify the detalls of your paraboloid in analogy to the previous light source dialog box The tap section defines the local anis systern Let us put the paraboloid atthe origin x y 2 0 3 The next section defines the geometry Set both xy and y 10 50 both xay and y to 50 thus covering the region Ex y sa se Set the focal length bot in x and Y direct n to 30 Selecta color and a name f
81. according to the resulting photometric properties fa mounted ight source LID on the ground It uses the distance othe half maximum candela race and the maximum candela peak as evaluation criteria Additionally a luminatin diagram With Catesan coordinates opens up to show the resulting distribution on the road surface with he road lines from the ES diagram Fist selecta LID Data View c distribution and then start the Street Luminaire Diagram via the comtext menu ight cick on uv data view gue 318 The Street Limo Dora this ight is of Type I medium range N Lateral distances are considered in multiples of the mounting height MH Longitudinal roadway nes UR and transverse roadway lines T are used to divide the lateral ranges into zones The parameters ofthe Street Luminaire Diagram view are ted below IES rom rione Cin deese gute ies iue 3 19 The Sree uina Diagram Dialog Views mountain height MH 4 Vertical position of the light source above read level road el sie m Cellsize of the road sensor Le the distance between measure ment paints standard of o m Munition ype Select between normal norzona radial vertical halfspherical and cyindrical luminance The illumination is measured at oad race level foot candle Use the unit footcandie instead of lux i footcandle is appro 16764 The illumination range along the road is obtained from the diagram
82. ace between two Curves A54 Surface Between two Surfaces nn oncetratar aaa Le 1 Luc studio User s Guide P eee Ais phei len e 162 Aspheric Lene Per Formula I s 65 free orm Freenllens ree TL A64 TIR Total intemal Reflection Lens c TE A65 Potato Chip Lens ei free Forn vara Fes ens 111 F4 A67 Eliptie Lens emi d A65 Hyperbolic Lens A49 BI Li eerte E 4 7 Approximated and interpolated Cane e A72 Read Point Row P 72 rete iting Cuneo nn 472 Raad Value Row ene en Meus 174 Create Explicit Cune uu 48 Approximated and Interpolated Saee 5 e F4 AA Common Dialog Pat rr rr re 108 3 82 ead Point Cloud m 183 Create Paint Claud aN Fd Th Sample Pont Cloud fom Targa Sene rmm HB A85 Create Surface from Point Cloud Rome FAE A R rarna eae a 4A Create Pont Grid re omen TSE Earapotate Pit Gd eee 489 Sample Pont Grid from Target Scene Vado Create Point Grid on Surface c P Aci Create Fiting Surface icm 4 82 Read Value Grid J 4843 Create apt Suface 5e E 2 844 Create Skinned Surface meaner 14 845 Create Skinned Surface Lot n6 46 Create Skinned Surface Horizontal Vell us 49 Ray Deviation Correction EEEa dac Various Geometry Tools dani Create Anie System e re Tz Geste lpping Pane rr TM A303 create object Vector eet dao Create Polis fom ays e d dans Create Cfinderfrom Rays e d A30 Create Annotation Tet Wu emerit dao Crete Annotation Bag e m 5 Freeform Geometries Mena Selec
83. ach ray depending on its wavelength Far a detailed description please refer to Sec tion 7 2 8 Spectral Powe Distribution SPD or Sertion 7 6 Special Refection Retraction and Absorption Distributions Determines the efficacy ofthe tamp In the complete final system there are tasses flight Gn the lens the reflector air tc with this parameter this global loss can be taken into account to the lamp itself The range of the parameter is the interval o 1 Simple example When using an emitter with a fux af slm and a reflector with a reflectance of there is a loss of 20 gt Entering an efficacy af o 8 scales this emitter in a way that the resulting Hux in the sensor is im again Please refer also to Section Da Efcacy Scale Facto fag emitterin inverse direction checked he createdlight source emits thelight inthe opposite of surface normal name and color direction relative to the surface normal llminates back wards This can be helpful e to correcta minored paramet aston ofa shape Name determines the string shown e g in the TreeView The tolor determines the object s appearance inthe GeoView given n the four RGB values This has no effect onto any simulation process s Fire An exemplary sketet showing a HI os Tbe red row isthe angular distance his the half id where the cume dows halaf s maximum Diu amo 6 2 Classic Light Sources 6 2 1 Cylinder Light Source Thisfuncton creates a cy
84. ag create color image with tr If checked the image is created n the XYZ color farmat This Stimulus XYZ luminance format Is the same as in the usual sensor dialogs og create NxM panorama enabled a panorama o cameras wil be created similar to the toners panorama in the luminance camera horizontalverticalrange For bath ranges the given number af cameras picturesare equally distributed in the interval start angle end angle camera The view position is the postin the camera ooks at Enabling thetag view at the distance beween the camera and the viewing plane can be set The view direction is the direction the camera looks at the view position Using the default setting of oi the camera looks in E Simulation Fee oer maze eh ear Furnace d p Civis E uu IL RO g HB a P Pr rote Stier Sen igi seno Qr Figure 8 8 Te Luminance Image Sensor Light Dialog 2 direction This direction can be specified etherin cartesian or Polar coordinates In case of using a panorama s range isset relative to the view poston and direction up direction Determines the orientation o the y axis ofthe just specified ax isjvieuing system projection setting ith these parameters the field of view can beset to either per spectively or orthogonal torm view extents Theviewestents determines the size ofthe visible area the camera looks at This is analogous to the feld of
85. age absorp select from brary ton coeficient See Section 7 6 Spectral Reflection Refraction and Absorption Distributions Loc stape provides a media brary within several media for glass and plastic are available This waya special material simply tan be added by selecting itin the respective oe e s Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials 7 6 Spectral Reflection Refraction and Absorption Distributions Spectral distributions describe physical reflective refractive or absorber behaviour of materials or media asa function of the wavelength Fora reflector the spectral reflection distributlan returns the reflectivity between o total ab sorption and 1 ful reflection as a function af the wavelength Fora refractor the spectral faction distribution returns the fraction index determining the deflection o the ray when it enters the medium as a function f the wavelength Forarefactor the spectral absorption distribution returns the exponential constant determining the less af energy afa ray on its way through the medium Spectra reflection distributions are available for reflective actor materials see Section 7 3 Acte Materials Spectral refraction and absorption distributions are available far medi wich are in turn used for refractive actor materials see Section 7 5 Media for Refractive Materials ora more tharough dscussio of this topic please consult the LucdShape Techical Reference
86. al Reflection IR 200 Light Sereen View 15 55 index M T match emerge two NURBS curves Tert View 16 match t merge two NURBS surfaces 74 Tone Mapping 52 Materials 13 Toolbar eon 307 Menu Tons a2 Customization 35 transformation zi Message View 17 Set glabal anis 73 MF recor ens surface 124 Model Tree View u modify knot Vector in NURBS curve 74 UV Data View 36 modify knot vector in NURBS surace 74 Modify NURBS 73 v Mouse interaction Lon Message View 37 o Script Tex View 16 Object Vector 120 Volume Scattering 397 Objets Delete 70 Rename go Select 70 P s eflector lens susce 32 Pole from Rays 121 Principles of Luciastudio 11 R Ray Deviation Correction 118 Read Point Row 106 ebuild NURBS surface 75 reduce degree of NURBS curve 74 reduce degree of NURBS surface 74 RERET 227 Rhinoceros CAD import espont 12 s Script integration 20 Script Viem 16 Sensors 13 Shapes 23 E Surface Approximation 108 Interpolation 108 Procedural Surfaces swap u and vats on NURBS surface 74 Switch Board 30 E
87. al programming tne RayHistorySensor and Volume Scattering are not available when using the GPUtrace Simulation sete ENS Jemorsm oem temone amis iro esie re four aaj e rz eec mU aaa E m Dp Figure y The GPU Trace Simulation dog The drop down menu select GPU card allows to select the GPU wbich shall perform the ray trace This choice is independent to the rest of the system e g the GPU used for the monitor but of course the less additional work the chosen GPU has to do the faster the simulation is done 8 3 Light Mapping Simulation in contrast to Monte Cario simulations which intersect rays directly with actor shapes and thus require an enormous computational effort far the Tay surface intersections the Light Mapping simulation method starts directly on the actor surfaces and gets light rays from the sources that Teach the poston an the surface This way tne ay sufacentrsecon paints do not have ta be computed because they are already given as starting points af the method Asa result the light mapping simulations significantly sometimes by orders of magnitudes faster tan Monte Carla simulations Major drawbacks of light mapping simulations are their imitation to pure reflector models the tick of geting rays fram the source does nat work for refractive Shapes and the dependence on the parameterzatons of the rector surfaces bad parameteriz ations make bala
88. al txt editor can set also a temp directory the path to the company logo a background image file and the meshalug converter taol This tool usualiy is installed directiy Int the chosen LucidShape folder by senting the path it can be used in diferent Lucdshape installations tabe Libraries In this tab the paths to the respective abjects can be changed already set are the default settings according to the structure of the instalation 3 Miscellaneous Menus CAD Transfer pull down menu buttons radio button read CAD via rad button write CAD via radio button version radio button material exchange pe Pag color and textures fiag log importfexport Graphics radio button NURBS shading radio button trimmed surface Shading surface tessllation parameters surface tessellation parameters Inthe pull down menu all set asis can be seen and selected The buttons can be used to set to add to delete ar to list the tument anis Chooses the CAD program to be used for reading data Chooses the CAD program to be used for writing data Allows to select the version to be used Enables or disables the exchange of materials between Lucid Shape and Catia resp Rhinoceros which do not natively support physical materials I checked the parameters are taken from the Rhinoceros Render Material brary checked and performing the respective transfer al occuring error messages will be saved in this e t wil be c
89. alar data like gh intenstes on surface The data are displayed according to lacal coordinates u coordinates on the surface and they are color coded Several analysis methods for the data are available e g iso Iines smoothing fi tering inearorlogarthnic sealing Script and Tert View The text view shows a textual representation of the experimental setup as it is contained in the le t provides you with all the information on the experiment al tne implemented shapes and ayttacing data as well in the text view complete control of the objects parameters is possible Jti therefore recommended for experienced users af LucidShape and LucidS hell The script view is a textual representation as well but iis used Tor script Fles with fle name extension do M hda The main feature of a script view is the execute functionality E Getting started with Luctudia gue 25 The Tat View Message View The message view is a text view used for displaying log messages It is strongly recommended to keep the message window always open in your workspace Eros can mast easy be located by examining the log messages All log output is also stored in a fle called LucidShape log eid The Message View Beside rar and warning messages there are fourcommon messages concerning simulation resus tays stopped because of a trace level recursion This means that the stated number of r
90. aliable forthe four types linear logarithmic Munsell znd expo linea logarithmic Munsell nenial The clipping determines the maximal luminance value exponential So this luminance and all higher values are mapped 10255 This isindependentto he used type Le Ihas no effect onto the form ofthe mapping for the data below this value exposure This parameters effects the brightness ofthe shown picture tis pene scaled int stops ike acamera Achangeot 1 1 doubles rales the shown brightness 3 5 Light Screen View re tat upset Gereiy Fe Lytton Nee Seem m gue 3 242 Sereen View Menu The following menu entries are available under LightScreenVew info Shows information about the model i the message box semineut Zooms in out in small steps you can alsozoomin aut by maving the mouse wheat in upper lower direction ar by using the SHIFT and the LMB while moving the mouse up down 3552 Display Commands XrVew Sets the standard xY view 9 77 Sets the YX view Le reverses the standard XY view X pole Screen Sets the display tox pole angles Y Pole Sereen Sets the display to y pole angles zplane screen Sets the display to geometric units at the distance of the plane Inthe x axis used mostly for near fld applications where units are used rather than angles Views ECE Lines Toggles the display of ECE road ines on off 353 Coloring and Display Properties The frst three commands inthis section open
91. alue e o8 means that every rays loses 2o ofits current intensity The reflectance can be specified either by one value For the entire wavelength range or spectral via the SPO settings This snealy the same as the SPD the only diference is that we now describe the spectral reflective behaviour For further infarm ation please referto Section 7 6 Spectral Reflection Refraction and Absorption Distributions Theta is the incident angle af the incoming light relative to the surface narmal To model a dependency on the incident angie i is possible to use more than one value for theta The number of ines can be changed lathe s buttons each lie represents one term in a kind af t function 1f checked the SPO can be specified for each too additional to the already shown parameters Similar to the Lambertian distribution see Section 7 33 Lam berian Refleciive and Refractive a parameter can be supplied that controls the width ofthe Gaussian curve and effectively the surface roughness Either a HWHM or RMS value may be set The oot mean square value a s an angie given n radian In case of an elliptic behaviour tis value can set independently foruandy Measured in the profile of the beam the value determines the distance between the centre of he outgoing light and tne point t which the power is down to so in the profile this gives the spatial distribution ofthe outgoing light g a very smal value Tefers to a almost
92. am For general lighting there are the main groups Fluorescent Metal Halide and Sodium One can load any geometry fle by using this dialag bo The number of rays to be used for the simulation Creates the selected lamp model Performs a simulation with the selected model and creates a ray fe Checks the ray le asimulationhas to be performed before that The path and the name of the ray fle s EI Chapter 7 Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials ferent material types can be created arassigned tothe geometry in order to make ashape Recall ashape consists of geometryanda material The material properties and parameter are describe each in the section Emitter Materials Actor Materials and Sensor Materials itis possible to assign more then one materialto one geometry but this always has to be handled with great care eg a shape has both a sensing and a reflecting material assigned to there are wo possibities for a ray Either it can intersect with the sensor frst because the sensor does not deflect the ray in any way it continues is way and intersects with the reflector In the other case the ray may intersect with the reflector rst tis being defected and thus nether intersects with the senso Because itis unpredictable which case occurs the consequence may be a non uniform LUD in the sensor even fused a complete homogeneous light n case itis really necessary to have a sensor directly on a reflecti
93. ame dis Blay color local anis system 4 8 14 Create Skinned Surface Crestesa surface from a NURBS curve row A skinned surface isa surface treated by an approximation or interpolation through a set of cues select NURBS curve row surface See Section 4 8 Common Dialog Pars approximation parameters dis play color surface name 4 8 35 Create Skinned Surface Loft The same as above only that the NURBS curve ow is created by single curves which can be selected Different approximation and interpolation methods are avaliable Geomety curve selection list ex surface approximation parameters Alls which contains the selected curves piecewise The surface wil be piecewise Interpolated where the number af curves has to be N degreeti tight The surface is calculated with cubic spline interpolation the Li parameterization along the interpolation direction otho onal to the curve s calculated by the average square root of he chord length between the curves This corresponds to the Rhinos D loft tight method normal te surfaces calculated with cubic spline interpolation The U parameterization along the interpolation direction ortho Sonal to the cuve s calculated by the average chord length Between the curves This corresponds to the RhinogD laft normal method NURBS curve selection stand See Section 4 Common Dialog Pats and surface approximation parameters display color sur facena
94. an choose the HWHM of a cosine function This type le more directional than the simple Lambert type However you can limit the angular range of emission with bath emitter types in tne respective dialogs the half angie has to be entered Aso you can choose the directional emitter type and finally an isoradiant emitter type Of course you can also import emitter characterises from UD es Special light sources specific properties A good example for a special ight source she LED paint source Here you can define the angular emission characteristic in detail Thus tis possible t simulate any possibly LED that is not yet Stored in our database but you can also evaluate the impact o aed LED properties within an sting optical setup Another example you may be familiar with s the Ha low beam source ofan Automotive headlamp which i essentially a cylindrical light source that comes with an additional absorber shape the shield Some af these special ight sources you will need more aften than thers In any case they provide you esum eade sape every tine or oca a plications Light Sources 6 1 Base Options and Parameters Thsseclonsdescribes some othe options and parameters which are common to almost all light sources and thelr respective dialogs Local anis system to specify thelr location and orientation explained in detail in Section 1 Create Anis System oeste ees a oo Er aa aa
95. ance to the abject a lawer resolution is used for a very close view the highest resolution is used Sets a priority rom oto 3 this determines the handling af the textures inside the graphies f there s nat enough memory for athe textures ifthe picture is smaller tnan the object ts possible to just take it that small or repeat runt the whole abject is covered repeat mopping in jdirecton Divides the object into the entered number fareas the texture Issetanto each ofthese areas odio button magnification in Select the type at howto resize to either near standard method dying rule quaty fadia button mis with surface olor pleeteolor alpha ronge pho texture name or nearest neighbour lightly better ual The objecttset has a color with this option one either completely replaces this object color or allows a mixture ofabject and texture Defines the exact color which shall be modiiedvia the al havalue below Enables an interval around the exact pixel color so that the alpha more than one single color can be modifed This value sets the transparency ofthe texture the range goes rom o complete transparent 255 Gm transparent Set a name for this new texture to appear in the TreeView z E Chapter 8 Simulation 8 1 Monte Carlo Ray Trace The so called Monte Carlo ray race s the most important simulation method fora given emiteresctoresensor setup The basic algorithm is Straigh
96. ane The plane far the creation ofthe profle ares is the focal plane f the individual base curve profile The values entered are the distances from the origin ta the target planes The number of entries in the dialog box corresponds to the number af profiles a every base curve Therefore every rai can havea different argetz plane position Thisis the pestionafavtua plane where the light will be focused by the individual parts ofthe refector Thetargetradial positions oranges far the creation of the prale arcs are the facal paints on the target pane The numberof input parameters radial postions ar angles coesponds tothe number profiles These entries correspond to xy coortinates on the plane The radial position isthe postion on thetarget plane where the reflected light wil be focused E reform Geometries Menu Selection 55 PCS Incontrastto the lens surface the PCS lensis a complete component consisting of bath the inner nd outer surface Tabs in the dalag allow to chose Between the allowing types Lens This FF geometry creates a poly curve system lens Besides aspherical lenses also TIR or Fresnel optics can be generated TASE EE ETE preme er RU Rm ET Fire 5 37 FF Geometry PCS Lens Dialog round aspheric lens aspherical Fresnel variable Fresnel rectangle Ti Fresnel Common parameters of mos lenses are cat ength Specify the focal length ofthe lens Athens ofthe lens like curvat
97. ange The number ot values define the discretizatlan of the curve lens thickness Parameter which is only available for the two choices absorption coefficient from inner transmission dispersion Parameter which is only available for the choice absarprion coeficient fom innertransmission inc fese May be supplied as constant or as a spectral dlsperslan curve E Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials 73 The BSDF Wizard 73 BSDFs ina nutshell Recall that BSDFs bidrectonal scattering distribution functions are used to speci difusely re fective ar refractive surfaces In LucidShape BSDFs are realized by control curves For getting a rough understanding of how BSDFs model the scattering behaviour af a reflective surface Fst consider the classic mirroring surface see picture right below An incoming ray is faflecedby the surface the outgoing ray direction is determined by the classic reflection laws fom the incoming rays direction and the surface normal No scattering of ight ito adjacent direc tions occurs so this classic non Jscattering behaviour is described by a BSDF which is 1 at eo andoforbes The angle sends for tne deviation frm the direction of specular dea reflection LI iue 3 assie ection witha any sctteing The SQ oh SO al other values ef in contrast Lambertian scattering is described by cosine BSDFs and Gaussian scattering not sur singly by Gaussian BSDFs see picture right below owe 7
98. as normal horizontal radial no use afa cosine faciar vertical half spherical cylindrical and half cyindrcal button Default Road Uses a default road position with the light source at 1o s button Default at Uses a default wall position with the light source at uso plone gt x pole Calculates a luminous intensity distribution from a illumination ona plane The given igh distribution is reversely projected into aX pole angle system piane pole Uke above but the projection occus in a Y pole angle system plone gt Zpole Like above but the projection occus in a Z pole angle system Views source positon source optical axis source base direction UD wv ange UD uv aeta meter fortor Mumination Type button Default Road button Default Walt spit data frames e ny sin se ms Louro ef up Verse E E uo wees IZ RT Urte Figure 35 he Plane to XYZ Diog The position af the light source The direction ofthe Z axis The direction ofthe Xs The new UV range for the calculated luminous intensity distribu tion The size ofeach etry in U and V The mete factor is used to calculate the illumination in f lu menin Allows the user to select between six different types of lumina on types such as normal horizontal radia no use ofa cosine factor vertical half spherical cylindrical and half cylindrical Uses a default road position with the light source at 90 635 Uses a default
99. asising a single Value wil produce a lightly ed or bluesky depending on the user s demands The lane width allows ta atter the width ofthe driving lane applied when pressing set E sia Se i ee ro Se RO EUR m m E E E re E pa p je rs Sa Red one S av SS ELE prise Jui disk AQ esta pee E ERR RN more foreground ligt and raises the horizon towards the tp ofthe window A value f socom or more wil place the horizon vertically in the centre of the driver s view 3 Applications Some explanatory notes In order to be able to reproduce a measurement with the same settings t might be a good idea to either save the configuration or record all changed values ls possible to add import further objects ta the scene Please note that the unit factar in this application is set to m so Luridshape objects may need to e scaled to fit Into the geometry After imparting an object mark the GeoView right click into t and open the Surface Display Properties dialog Within switch to the tab Lacan check TextureLighr Tis option wili show bath the texture and the light on This application merely projects beams onto the road t does not perform a ray trace sono abject Will generate a shadow or block the light propagation The Stock scene can be shown hidden via Menu gt GeoView Stock Scene 21 2 Virtual Beam Pattern This application makes use of the method Reverse Sensor Light explained in Section 8 62
100. ays have been stopped because they have reached their nit of intersections recursion stays stopped because of an intensity t intensity level Aray wil be considered as absorbed and stopped tracing ifits intensity level is smaller than 2 given critical value manly due to absorption processes tays reached shape Le absorber without outgoing ray Aray has reached an absorber and will not traced any further 7 Getting started with Luclstudia rays without any intersection in the Monte Carlo ray tracer This states the number of rays which had na intersection at ali during the ray trace these are the socalled direct rays stays were rejected by sensors Herearay is rejected bya sensor Le itis not counted This is because its current refractive index differs from the the settings in the sensor Per default sensor only detects rays with a refractive index ofo aif but of course it can be adjusted to any other medium e inside a light guide Tesselation Warning Ran out of auxiliary vertices This message may occurin former versions of LucidShape during the tessellation af complicated surfaces when the number af angles or vertices needed to tesseliate the surface correctly exceeded a certain threshold It is an error message which means that the related surfaces aot be simulated via the triangle method This af course has a negative eflect onto the simu Tation result Newer versions of LuciaShape hav
101. be used asa replace 4 gt ment far the emitter s geomeny P E TS Sess Fam ues Fo Pores position ray fle name Pag prelood ali rays every n roy revert rays RE d iate rte 7 Details ofthe Ro Light Source Dialog Determines the coordinates and the axis ofthe ray fle emitterto becrestes The fll path and the name of the ray fle have to be entered If checked the complete ray fle Q e alrays in i0 is pre loaded into the RAM inthe moment the light source is created ar the modet is loaded into LucidShape unchecked the rays will be Tead one afer another duringthe simulation process and deleted afer use The second choice is slighty slower but wil take much less AM may be important on PCs with limited RAM This integer determines whether all rays i or every n ray vi Istaken forthe simulation the other rays between wil be skipped Revers ll rye directions Light Sources ont Light Source The point light source isset upby an axis system and an emitter material The atis defines the position and orientation nal af the point source Due to the fact that this source is one dimensional and has no Tea sur face the z axis wil be taken as the surface normal instead This light source has no new options or parameters 6 3 Special Light Sources 634 Volume Light Source Avotume ight source creates random rays within a volume using a pre defined directionality This can bea c
102. bee py sem C thickness Patan n d ce 4 4 he TR Lens dilog Geometry 4 6 5 Potato Chip Lens Creates multisurface shape object fora variable aspherical lens inpotato chip form The shape consists of acone surface on one side and an optical surface with four FF refraction curves an the other side These four cures are called the west north east and south curve Far each curve iets with value pairs with factork and factor in each pair contral the creation af each patch AE SE SW inthe VaroSurface The refraction Indexand absorption coefficient may be set ferent for the inner flens and outer medium The Fresnel lag for the refractor object may be set o tora Foreachcuve NS E and W fne output angle may be entered polynomial degree The polynomial degree af the profile curve inner outer diameter The two radi af the lens Normally the inner radius iso inner outer height The two heights ofthe Nat side Normally both sides have the same height and the fat side becomes a disk thickness The thickness of the lens Lethe thickness in z direction side surface Enables disables the creation ofa fx side ofthe lens outputangleN S E W The ray output angle forthe four different curves ean deyas hue antes in erha se b m Fo m Figure 415 The Potato Chip Lens dialog I quee EVE 4 6 6 Free Form Variable Fresnel Lens Creates a variable Free Form Fresnel lens The dialog box and nearly all
103. box is enabled It checked the scale dialog box is enabled If checked the with mirror dialog box is enabled Applies the specified number ot lterings onto the resulting LID If checked the resulting LID wil be mirrored at the vs more precise it wilt be copied in the opposite direction leading toa doubling ofthe T If checked the resulting LID will be mirrored at the vanis mare precise it will be copied in the opposite direction leading toa doubling of the fx 1 checked additional parameters are enabled to specly a bird s eye view see description below It checked applying wili show the resulting LIO and in addition allsoure IDs Multiple uses of one a single LID e mirroring Mili not be shown Iset to o the LID editor is as described here iset to a number larger than o an additional tab appears Dynamic Sets see de scripon below This value determines the number of line e singe LID inthe Ioad D section After changing sets or lies this button has to be pressed to apply the changes onto the dialog Displays the resulting LID either in the pole or ate system please also refer to the chapter n LucidTechnicat pdf Polar Angle coordinate Systems Determines the range and the angular resolution of he range Determines the range and the angular resolution of the v range Determines the range and the resolution af the dynamic set range E ubtdior Figure 20 4 The LD dtr Options and Parameter
104. cal stant sweep angle The helixis created from startto sweep where 36o sweep angle sta angie defines the number of loops slope Thisvalue defines the increase for one loop The complete length ofthe heli can thus calculated as follows slope g o sweep angle start angie 444 6 Compound Parabolic Concentrator A parabolic are that sends light coming from a point ight source inthe ares focal point in a unique direction entry radius The entry radius af the CPC curve Le the inner radius extangle The exit angle for the light rays 44 Curve from Formula This tool creates 20 curve from an entered formula The formula may beentered in an explicit form yet orin a parameter farm x u y z u The curve canbe created as a polyline or as a fitting curve with apraxim stion and interpolation methods stematvl Geometry parameter explici parameter form formula yo formula xu y 200 of points range min max The parameters ofthe curve One can either use the expliitor the parameter form ofthe curve Tre formula of the curve in explicit farm The formula of the curve in parameter form The number of points either far the polyline or the ting curve The min max range ofthe curve on the X axis polyline ppraximaton nter Radio button to check which method should be used The polation methods are either a polyline or a ting curve with approxima tion interpoiation methods ome The name ofthe c
105. ce emiten but shielding by ather objects in between is considered 3 62 Reverse Sensor Light in most cases ane has a model with some actors at least one sensor and one or more emitter however they have been created Next a ray race s started to achieve a resulting UD This is done by simulating the interaction atthe generated rays through the madel propagation interse tion absorption eic Butthere arealso some cases the opposite way is wanted Here one has a LID howeverit has been created and is looking for an emitter which i able to reproduce this present LID To reproduce means the calculated emitter ts simulated in an usual forward ray race and asa result we achieve he same LID we already had before the complete procedure was started The calculation process tan be done in Luc Shape and is called Reverse Sensor Light This type of reverse ray traces used in some ofthe applications listed in Chapter s Application The reverse process is done as follows First you deine a vitual point light source The light in each sensor of your setup ls projected back into that virtual oit source The light n the vital point ight source s stored in a ight data object and displayed ina data view Reverse sensor ight calculates a luminous intensity distribution rom given sensor data as if that ditibuton had been emitted rom the vidual point gh source From a previously simulated scene with light in allsensors or with a scene setup by hand
106. cets These facets can bused to determine the normals for building up the pyramids fiag hide planes 1f checked the assistance surfaces will be hidden refraction angle The reflected beam can be widened by choosing an angle larger han zera The value has to be entered in angular minutes 7 From Geometries Menu Selection well ines Determines the thickness e he distance between the coner af ihe pyramid and the base surface incase some af he corners are breaking through the base surface either ty increasing the Wall thickness or change the orientation af the pyramids orientation Determines the orientation of the pyramids in the plane more precise the starting direction af the first pyramid This choice May have influence to the number af objects to be created The meaning of the two directions north and east is very simlar ta those inthe PCS application raft angle In case of using a nonplanar surface the normals used to de ermine the orientation of the pyramids along the surface are not parallel to each other The draft angle can be used to incline the pyramids surfaces to make the production ofthe ral produc mare easy wrench be Determinesthe arenci size ofthe single pyramids Le the radius fei cde ofa pyramids oor area iat element in ratio to wrench This value determines the aspect ratio ofthe rectangle and thus e the form af the patter only avallable for the rectangle base type Pag focussing th
107. ch holds the surface to be used angle ype Defines the angle type B type pol A type pol or type pate 72 8 Spectral Power Distribution SPD Beside the basie type of the emiter it furthermore can be specified via the SPO this determines he spectral behaviour af the resulting light source The options and parameters are explained in the following table for further and more detailed information e about the step rf function and the corect use of the channels and the number of values which have to be entered please lso rafer ta the LucidTechnical pdf mentioned at the top of this chapter E Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials Figure 7 8 The Special Power Distribution SPD Dialog with different options 0 SPO color temperature select function step function function guss function No SPD is assigned to the emitter The ray tracing will be per formed as 1f there was monochromati light but without a spe tle wavelength This means that rays are treated as purely geo metric Le classical ray optics f a ray le emiter s used and Ihe ray fle contains SPO information the SPD s taken from the fay fle This choice yields no further dialog elements Ablack body color temperature is chosen for the spectral distri bution function The intensity distribution 2 function of temper ature the higher the temperature the shorter the wavelength of the intensity maxima The color temperature Is always writte
108. cireularlight guides Selectacurve to create the prism band on it You also can choose to create a test curve via the test curve button Pressing a button will insert a base surace curve for testing the diferent settings of this dlalog pressed an additional dialog pops up In here one can choose the material among various diferent types of either refractive or Tefiective behaviour and set the refraction inde pressed a table dialog pops up Within every single value for al parameters can be set individua The changes can be adopted int the model via Ser and the data can be im or exported in he sesu fle format The Dot Mask for back light feature creates the geometry patte to scatter ight from within alight guiding device to break the condition of total internal reflection and couple the light out of the device Typical application examples are LCD back ight plates keypad lighting af hand hel devices or bacit acrylic plates for advertising purposes 19 Freeform Geometries Menu Selection Harale ostan saich C satiare AC Eoee meme an n Fbheitierlerg cri rms C mmm Figure ss Te Basie Surface Partof the Dotmask Dialog The dot mask dialog features three separate tabs to control the base surface the parameters for the dots far the pattem and the piten The pitch s the distance between two neighbouring dots either inu orv direction button select suface depth
109. clear selection Unselect ali selected objects execute selection Executes or edits the selected object editselection by scrpt Eds the selected object ina new script view 3 2 2 Tree Node Properties plckcable property Enables a dsabes the obec pckableattibute which enables ite selection Ist the objecti assigned a P in the te view traceable property Enables or disables the object s traceable attribute which en ables its ability to be ray traced with a shape I set the abject is assigned a T in the tree view set property hows or hides the geometry in Geo views se the object is assigned a V in the tree view Views 323 Tree Display ode details Msat shows detalis of the selected tree node expand tree Expands the tree in ful detall making all leaves visible collapse ee Collapses the tree making only the root node visible fatten tree Makes the basic objects in the tree visible es than expand mare than collapse 34 Elements Display Filtering elements display filtering The Elements Display itering option pops upa dialog ith checkboxes to toggle the tree display ofvarious LucidShape data types or properties on or af see the picture right below reer pom cide pete I sonay 2D ges roe Teide po Loo oe 2 nm Teese T neges rd T sate pami aedis Figure 37 The ements Display tering Dolo 33 Text View ie te rece Geom funi Ughiouce Maend Sewer Satin ure s Tet Vew Me
110. content menu af the ight data window to navigate through the dierent facets 5 7 Procedural Surface PS Refractor This group of FF geometries creates a PS Lens with different base forms talus the user to define different focal postions for the horizontal and vertical V curvature of the refactor The concept of the PS Lenses is the same as for the PS Reflectors the available options and para meters are nearly the same as Tor their reflector counterparts he main diference are additional options and parameters for refraction ike refraction index thickness inner outer optic etc in te respective dialogs Fora more detailed description ofthe options parameters and a short tutorial please see also the manual ProcedurlSufoeAnpliatons po avallable in the same folder as the other pdt fles as per default ucidshapeldoc or via the help button in the respective menu entries There are three base shapes available for PS Refacors in LucidShape Rectangle Lens Rotational Lens and Extrusion Lens Fresform Geometries Menu Selection e E ste geo ee er ua E mmc e jeer r r r nn Rem ipiam i Cee cares reflec B Fr le S ramiame nan ane alain cop eek cum gre PS Lens Dialog part with optie promete radio button lenstype Determines whether this lens shall bean inner or an outer optic refraction index Determines the refraction index of this material SO femel Determines whether the reractrisi
111. d n the calculation he name of the abbreviation is specified in the load tab af this dialog One can use the same LID several times In the calculation In the de faut setting there are only s different LID fles 3 aF them are oing to be mirrored in the dialog ox which in toral leads to 8 ferent UD fles Ghia ua y Stetchesjshrinks the used LID Inu u vor v direction inde pendently trom each other This stretch is expressed as a factor Which does not affect the original LID tony stretches tne UD Forthe calculation of the resulting LID The stretch shrink s per formed relative to the respective anis Eg a LID going down to veu anda factor of o s leads toan extent down to v 2 A LID Tot having light in the u section cannot be stretched here of shin ue Shits the LiD in u andor v direction for the calculation ofthe resulting LID the units are taken in degree rotate z Rotates the used LID about the z axis the units are taken in de ge seale Scales the intensity value ofthe used LiD minoria uv If checked the used LID will be mirrored for the calculation this an be dane in u and or vdirection independentty Thefollowing tmo figures show the lve single LiDs loaded upper one they are combined to achieve the resulting LiD lower ono The lower picture shows both the usual view upper pa and the bird s eye view omer part The coordinate systems ofall five IDs are setto identical values un Unas Yan Ymar
112. d between a rectangular and a polar ven Ieheckedthegapofthe grid Uns can be specie independently foruandv G Views fiag iso line definition ifehecked sets fis lines can be chosen entered or altered All sets are saved in the ii fle of the curent LucidShape version here they can be altered too button set pressed the currently active set is applied onto the UWiew button odd After been set as active the iso line set can be saved button delete 1t pressed the currently active set wil be deleted button ist pressed all saved sets are listed in the Message View eg show sone tie marks with I checked these marks in the color bar are not arranged depend equal spacing Ing on their respective values but in equal distances andthe Calor bar s set to white Cher bon C Herde C Bommen esa ope ternama cnn Deme CB Oar C Gayon itne C Cir Om telson C Geek C Gne Garin Back freehand C REM Gr stems sat ume i Figure 3 22 The UV Data Properties View i radia button intensity color This radio button toggles between dierent madi for the color map scaling Linear logarithmic Munsel formula or RGB gamma cor rection decades This determines the scaling of the colar in the UWView The gen ral formula i log tao de lgoo ded Ris ane channel TRGB and de the given number of decades display type for d The display type for a candela intensity can be chosen among Candela Lux on t
113. d the volume sensor a three dimensional enhancement ofthe usual sensor concept There are also infinity sensors Ike the candela sensor which can not be applied toa finite surface ie not to any of the shapes a user has created These sensors are configured completely within their dialogs and use infinity surfaces nite large Infinitely distant The parameters in the following are common ta most or even all sensors Sensor shape name and global scale Here descriptive names may be entered these names wil he shown in the tree view oo A glabal scale factor gives the possibilty to take global losses into account e g due to fabrication tolerances The default value is 3 which means no loss s assumed a value afo 7 for instance refers to a loss afintensity of 0 thus resulting Ina sensing ficency ot o Please note This linear sensor scale fact may not be mismatched withthe multiplicative efficacy scale factor used for ight sources1 se ps no cibles Renee tet fF Angle type Choose between three angle types X pole yp B pole ype A 2 pole ype nd Eulumdat ype O for more information about tne angle types please see the LcldShape Technical Reference The fou values Unan pa Yn ANd Vay determine the ange af the sensor area the two values Aj determine the resolution and thereby the subdivision e the celi size of the sensor Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials ee wenige pe hvgne C ogeCipe C npaCEULMDAT
114. de s 30 geometry view The picture right below shows an example with a law beam pattern used The reflector to create the pattem was taken from the model gallery without changes 8 Low Beam ECE Ric oval Haug oriri Iesensorrangesareu nolandv fos wtharesaition oF A andiypeA Theparametersusedtorestore the rays are Rectangle range ihi ao a ri Va Va and zo rays per light source The reglon is marked in orange inthe LIDView fer pressing restore Fays 20 rays are displayed in the GeoView heintersection area on the reflector Is marked in orange tao E Analysis of Geometry and LID Data ki Fires Typical Result of a Ray History Sensor Query 944 Ray Deviations and Checkerboard Images Creates a ray deviation using a checkerboard image to visualize the de terioration behaviour ofa lens This can be used eg to evaluate the be haviour ofa cover disc which in ideal case should not defect the light at Va E Aray deviation diagram is a two dimensional data image that displays the deflection ofa twa dimensional parallel ight unde by the lens The image shows the simulation result af an observer s view roma certain distance on a checkerboard through the lens There are some examples provided wth Luciashape especially one with good and ane with bad shapes goodShapes ug badShapelu to Alustrate the very diferent behaviour of a bad ens compared with a corrected one These Lug fles and same further d
115. del ihout any reflection or with the Fresnel law taken inta account p The scale allows to take losses due to absorption into account without having a physical model of the material equa to perfec transmissibility o s reduces the Intensity of each ray to he halfaf its actual value the total number of rays stays he same thickness Determines the thickness of the material The other options and parameters are nearly identical to those af the PC Reflector Fresform Geometries Menu Selection kc penser baw cune andaha part tec armas C pwcromas C aue Spe C zgane C wane sense seer ma RARE m m m m s mE e p n RET a ll m adut erip and ocr serv D pr Era Figure 5 22 PS Lens Dialog part with base curve parameters 5 8 Collimator LED Lens This FF geometry creates an LED collimator also concentrator optical partto be mounted directly ontop ofan LED primary optic You can choose Between a rotational symmetry round symmetrie one cuve elliptical two diferent main curves or specify tne curves UW S E w reform Geometries Menu Selection gue 5 23 Tbe parts afa LED Colimator The whole collimator contains several parts mainly there are the center ines part and the elector outer pan bath af them can have a front shape independently In the picture just above here are he rant center lue the side center red the reflector green and the fr
116. detailed representation of am actual Bulb This is mostly the case when precise values for luminance or luminous intensity re expected your experiment This is where LucidStudia s efficacy scale can assist Physically cacy t the Tatio of an emitted luminous power radiant power times sensitivity of tha human eye and the most electrical power tnat is used to generate it The efficacy scale factar in LucidStudia is the Seale factor by whieh the actual luminous power ata real emitter eth tungsten ais reduced bythe real lamp s geometry The ux we can measure experimental is always the flux ofa lamp nat of the emitting part oniy Hence the simulated initia funx ofan emitter material is increased LacidStudio in order to meet the inal real Aux values we know from experimental results The inverse application of the efficacy scale factar allows the rescale ofthe overall Rux of a Lucid Studio emitter for exactly this purpose Far convenience iis preimplemented fr many known automotive light sources of defined output As a result you only have to define the desired real ax far a certain light source with known geometry e g tio m for the H3 low beam headlamp Anefcacysal factor has been pre defined for ti very lig source and forts technical geometry This efficacy scale will increase the emitter Nuin LueidStudio ta ensure that your light source de ers the Mux you have chasen e g 1200 n and thus compensates all known losses in output It as
117. e same A tate leet tie i en n a Figure 9 3 The 3D Snapshot Diog windowsizexy Defines the extent of the window the snapshots are taken from fa window is set into focus whose values willbe adopted automaticaly tnese values wil be updated every time the win dows is highlighted horizontai verclongle range The respective starting and ending angle values of the series to betaken of pcre The numberof picturesto be made in each angular direction The default settings 18 and 10 wil produce so pictures in total test and set horizontal vertical Sets the modet in the curently focussed geometry view to the angle designed horizontal and vela angle save snapshots in divectoy Enter here the directory the pictures shall be saved into Chapter 10 LIDEditor 204 Overview This chapter handles the LID Editor and the LID Editor Gallery The editor sfor editing and composing LUD lee light intensity distribution the gallery is kind af an example ibrary which contains sev eral pre defined setups The D Editor is a toal forthe theoretical examination ofthe question How can achive a beam pattern with a given set of modules To be able to solve this question the editor can add and Compose diferent LID fles After the Fles have been leaded tne individual LIDS can be customised Guetched sited rotated scaled and mirrored Assume one has to or like to invent a perfect theoretical light intensit
118. e 33 The Surface Display Properties Diog main dato type One canselectamong Curvature Radius DraftAngte Lux Lumen and cdh When showing the drat angle the draft direction can specified per default it E set to 03 surface data display type The main data type can be displayed in false colar ight col ort surface color or surface color shine Surface color uses the color range fram Black to surface colar surface calor shine uses colar range from black to surface colarand in addition to White therefore t appears shiny intensity color mop Switches between linear logarithmic and Munsell similar to logarithmic data display For more information about the Munsell ype please refer also to the Technical Reference Manual use min max range Ieheckedtheenterd min maange is used forthe respective data type display ype Switches between the different display types Point displays the geometry with a point raster Views Triangles displays triangle meshes Curvature the curvature ofthe surface is displayed in dierent olors Colored the surfaces are colored thelr normal directions define the color Texture displays the texture ona surface Wireframe displays the geometry with a wire frame Shaded switches to shaded display Draft Angie displays the raft angle ofthe geometry via a color map on the surface The draft angles defined as 90 where ais the angle between the surface normal and
119. e Rayfiles ss eeaeee 566 Compute a Rays Pacudo Focal Point PFP S Project RayFle on Geometry E 6 Lamp Models far Rays a n nnn 7 Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials 7 The Dialogs Create Material and Assign Material 5 ee Ta EINE Mati aaaea 7 24 Lambertian Enter 222 Directional Emitter perenne ey aaraa eE 724 Ray Fle Emitter i 225 UD Fle Emiter wt READ CI HER center A 233 UD Surface Emitter 7 28 Spectral Power Distribution SPD s Over vidualrssiesuti nf AE UR MU HM EE A Luc studi User s Guide 734 Meal Miror efleciv A 23 ideal Lens Refractive 233 Lambertan elective and Relacile rem TB 734 Gaussian Reflective and Refractive e re rrr 20O 235 Gaussian Retro reflex tfecive 300 736 Lambert Gauss Combination Reflective and Refractive 200 73 20 BSDF Theta Curve Reflective and Refractive onoono 291 233 30 ASDF data from ie Reflective and Refractive E 233 Ag Reflective E Tai Nebel rraca secte cemere M 74 Sensors and Sensor Materials ES 743 Candela Sensor EM TAXRN He Sein secet Recte demin ate FAB ay HER Set aiana aea and 244 Volume Sensor E TAS UBM FN Senate niaaa pee e TM FAS Dit Sensors ES 7 47 Mumination Lad Light Fux Lumen and Luminance Candela per ma Sensor Maler Losses unciisbumm ise pud iai ipio TAM LN Ua ANE arrocar areae n E 743 license Pate Sensor 25 7 5 Wadia for Refractive Materials osna ere edema eie ee E 7 6 Spectral Reflection Re
120. e The path and the name of the input ray fle output ry fle name The path and the name of the output ray fle target fle format The fle format of the output ray fle available are spectral LucidShape ASCIorbinan andnor specralLucdsnape ether ASCI or binari overnite fux The fux ofthe output ray fle may be altered to this value infim this is Independent to the number of rays stored init This value Isalso shown in the message box far te total ux or in the tert dit view for the Rux of individual rays This ls useful e g while using ray fles with different utes so one can kind of equalize the ray fles opy only rays wth min Copies only rays with a certain minimum percentage in intensity copy each N ray Copies oniy each N ray this function can be used to reduce the number af rays in the output Fle e g to have a small ray fle for Avery fist sketch of changes In the model Pag reverse roys Inverts the direction ofthe rays es 6 68 0508 Light Sources atm enone evans E Freins z Tena Unite ASC Libet C ASAP tiny speciltunasreye esc C spesa Lsssane sey m a r thiamin sien we b m zws D B sem p o DB m sewe I 5 iure 38 The Copy Raye Dialog og with transformation t checked one can alter the position and the scaling ofthe ray fe The scaling changes the size ofthe emitting volume this can be setindependenty for the three is Tis procedures analogue th
121. e a better algorithm to contral the number of triangles which in mast cases avoids this error To male sure that the new algorithm 1s used open the dialog Ma Menu Options gt Global Settings Graphic Change the value far maximal auxiliary nades per surface ta o Zero means that as much triangles or vertices as necessary are created to fatte surface tessellton parameters 123 Mouse Interaction Inthe folowing LMB stands for Left Mouse Buon and RMB for Right Mouse Button rma In all views pressing the RMB opens the context menu LMB Geo View There are tree different modes within the Geo view G Normal or Select Geometry mode G BUTTON 5 Select Shape mode BUTTON P Select Pivot Point mode P BUT TON ESC Toggle mode ESC BUTTON Difrent mode enable different cursor symbols 6 Ta enter the geometry or normal mode press the button G7 Select a geometry by double clicking the LMB 9 Tosnterthe select shape mode press the button S Select shape by double clicking the LMB P To enter the select pivot point mode press the button b Doubie clicking the LMB ta select a pivot pont A ray wil be shot into thesceneat the position where you double click with he LIMB tnis position will became the pat point Sub sequently the geometry will be shifted n a way that the Pivot point is at the center of the window Getting started with Luclstudia ESO By pressing the ESC button one can tog
122. e ar required directory press the Open button Color selection works in the same way but the dialog selection is compelled with the OK button Script integration One ofthe basic concepts af Lucidshape lsthat scripts canbe easy integrated Ifyou need to extend LucidShape s functionality simply write a script to do the task There is also a scr interface to interactive dialogs and you canintegrate your ow script functions in the menu tree of LucidStudio The task Test Scene from the Tests menu is an example for an interactive script function Interactive Ray Trace Bo important and powerful feature is the interactive ray trace It allows you to check the optics of Your experiment iran instant The displayed ray traces are created by so called ray trace bundle bjects The bundle starts at the current ray start position set in Properties dialog box and goes over the current touched surface The defaults one singe ray only For diferent purposes you Ean have diferent types of bundles Le a flament bundle or a parallel bundle You may creste hem with the dialog rom the defaut task Fle Also you may edt them in a separate He and add he fle to your geo view with Ada fle or Add recent fle Getting started with Lucudio You can ask for a light screen view Ths view displays the images laments or set of dots of the ay path bundles on a 10m screen 13 The First Example A Guide to LucidStudio nt
123. e complete appearance of the dia log Ifyou do not ned individual spread angles check his box to apply the same spread to all facets of one block Define the steps between the facets Gn Z direction perpendicular to the reflector Steps can be specified separately for U direction horizontal facets and V direction vertical facets Define the border position with U V coordinates to conrol the tonnecton of a facet to its neighbor This function is nfuenced bythe chosen patch calculation sequence In case of individua facet reatment you can switch to automatic reference wth checkbox Define the start point for tne calculation ofa facet These values can be altered manuali to assist when default positions o o lead to facet degeneration or other strange calculation results In case ofindvdual facet treatment you canswitcn to automatic start point with a checkcbo this uses the reference point see abo as start point s Freeform Geometries Menu Selection Eom Qu owe s g MF reflector flens dialog Sites The active facets can be chosen by switching each facet ono of onoff Tuma facet on or off by un checking its box The facets are z labeled in arder of postion UV spit always Treat facets Individually e g for sensors keep gap surface Take surfaces between facets to accountin simulations Uncheck to ignore gap surfaces 5 3 Switch Board When a model grows larger and contains more than ane or two ligh
124. e creation lengths Defines the length of the ares degree Sets the polynomial degree af the individual prof ares fans Defines the number of rcs to be fitted The curve may be rebut after calculation with the entered degree and arcs in order to ob tain a more smooth reflector but keep in mind hat this may cause modifications in the light funcion E Fresform Geometries Menu Selection og prof ono og wth end Switches one or both profiles on off En disables a fx end ofthe reflector surface and one can change this fix end via the two values in the table Pog ares extend defined in polar W disabled the extentis given in cartesian coordinates enabled ongles ofprofies insert profe before ease profile at the values determining the extent are given in degrees Changes the numberof available proles Specifies the position where the new prot is inserted Specifies the profile to be removed Mamie U Soo Tama mI m BT ERE e coc OR cat BW BE coc BB S E TNT TT e cc OBOB EN Wu s PTET BRST coco SS RR Figure 5 6 PCS Diog Light Source and Target Part sourcexy radio button nearfarjvirtual phones radial positions ingles Defines the ight starting position far the corresponding base Switches between near eld ihe entered values are interpreted asa position on the z plane far feld the values stand for aug Ing anges and tual the values stand fora position onavital pl
125. e fist two surfaces iby the ay ec The ntendedeffectsto increas the amount of hesnel relected Tays significantly sa the nls n the sensor Is reduced igni ant too This might very helpful when using the Luminance Gamers Sets the roy under which the simulation process runs on your Mindows system I set too high this may render your system unresponsive tls strongly recommended to keep the setting normal priority M unchecked the dialog changes to a minimum version the only accessible parameter ls the number of ras E Simulation gue 62 20 Sketch with activated Tesselation The original ound surface draw in blach the ingles inblue te distance dine s he chord high 8 2 GPU Trace Simulation This method is quite the same as the Monte Cario Simulation asit uses the same parameters and options The major advantage isthe additional use ofthe graphie card some parts ofthe computing are transferred to the GPU where the calculation is magnitudes as fast as on a common CPU due to the special architecture ofthe GPU keyword massively parallel computing Please note The GPUtrace Simulation is only available for nVIDIA graphic cards because CUDA is needed for the calculation process Please also refer to Mip vaww brandenburg gmbh de producs goutrace requirements for further informations Furthermore theres no possibilty to select the simulation method NURBS the only available type ia Triangle Due to the intem
126. e leave the lens parallel _ The lens may ether be created as a rotational tens with a given diameter and a start and sweep angle as an extruded lens with a given and a start and end length oras a toroidal lens with a radius height and a start and Sweep angie The dialog parameters for the hyperbolic lens are exactly the same as for the eliptical lens see Section 467 Elliptic Lens E Geometry 4 6 9 Spherical Lens Creates a spherical lens The lens ls made up of multiple surfaces The local ans systemis the local coordinate system ofthe lens The reaction Indexes and absorption coefficients or the lens medium and the outer seh ei barr Ter N Rr reflection The spherical lens comes in four different flavours Planar Convex Planar Concave Biconvex and Biconcave The two planar versions ave a planar losing surface while the Bi versions mirror the original concave or Conven surface in order to obtain the fll lens shape geometry properties focal length The facal length of the lens diameter The diameter af the lens i 3 thickness Te thickness ofthe ens radii ratio The ratia of the to diferent radi for the types Biconceve and Bionves ene popes Cer al ride aa w e ir Figure 438 The Spec Lens dialog 4 7 Approximated and Interpolated Curve This section presents various tols to ead point data rom extemal fles and generate continuous curves fram the data via interpolation
127. e original sample 1 Openthe dialog and press nto model this creates a new geometry window containing a disk shaped ight source directional emitter and a sensor type C 2 Add the sample as an shape inta the geometry tis strongly recommended to have the centre oit at the position 60 0 and is narmal parallel or anti parallel to the zaxis The light automat ically is being emitted in either o0 o o according to the type ofthe material eflective or refractive Depending on the size of this sample it might be necessary to adjust the size of the emitter luminate the sample with a rather large polar ange f any light Is missing the shape the emitter radius has to be reduced 3 Now the angle range and step size or both d and g have to be specified Please note that the range has to start at o The ranges determine the array of scanning angles the sample is il minated from 4 Press reset the light sources positioned at the starting position andthe given number af rays are simulated This gives a first impression of the resulting LID 5 Ifall parameters have been set mark the GeoView and press un ll to start the recording process A permutations af the angle pairs are simulated ali these single shots are saved into he three dimensional sensor 6 Markt UVView and press mal BSOP this converts the LID data nto BSDF data It appears asa second UWiew but with a diferent names BRDF from Maker Mark this new daa and save it onto your HDD n
128. e points to wo Activating this Nag has to effects The entered value forthe refrac hot spots tion angie is overwritten and the x ight reflexes are combined drive hotspots The default orientation of the reflector and thus the pyramids due to the calculation process is as folis Tne emitter is located somewhere at io emitting the ight towards the xj plane e he reflector reflects the light back in z direction 5 12 Genetic Algorithm Optimizer The Genetic Algorithm Optimizer or GAOptimize is a newtool for assist ance in the development of lighting systems surfaces tis automatically altering a parameter set of optical components simulating and evaluating ach experiment The parameter spaces user defined and the evaluation is done with a pre defined meri function This merit function farces the optimizer e g to approach a uniformity criterion or to equal a cera LID This can be done with two algorithms either witha genetic oneorvia the imple system of toral permutation The options and parameters af the Optimizer as well as a short tutorial with an exemplary setup and description ofthe optimization process are explained in the separate manual GAOptimizer pdf ta be found on our website at http wmww brandenburg gmbh de products lucidshape down loads whitepapers E Frefom Geometries Menu Selection 5 13 Model Note This design feature enables a tent window which then is part ofthe model and is saved with t This
129. e position and orientation ofthe cylinder defined by an oft relate to the light source s position and direction Light Sources t a Were BE OB we R R R iee 8 B Ta Mentis E inse R midi Figure 6 The Cylinder lament Bund Dolo direction Direction ofthe flament orientation lament length The length af the cyiinder Flament radius The rads ofthe cylinder number of points The number af rays for each side of the cylinder 653 Free Surface Filament Bundle Creates a free surface flament bundle The ray bundles may originate from any surface you like On a selected surface a point grid is created ang used ina RayPathFlamendBundie objec The grid size and resolution effectively the number af rays can be selected via the number af points inae ef tet REASESEEDTT eke fet me i we EP m n n n FE Figure 624 he Pree Surface Flament unde Diog Free surface flament Mark any surface in either the GeoView or the TreeView mumberofpeisibuy The number of grid points in u and v direction on the surface s Light Sources 6 5 4 Cone Bundle Crete bundle emerging om he deed suis pol ean NO DO PAA TAANA PA MIDA D eee nr aea hoaa on AAMA ain KU SAAE te raion tie gt can be determined vith tne ae veu mee OO emmae E d ge 4 The Cone unde Dialog hose vector Base vector for the polar grid cone angle The cone opening angie in degree mumberofmysin amp e T
130. e scaling which can be done with the Transform dialog Light Sources 6 6 4 Check Rayfile the unding bon he tl xa ten ay vie P4 a input roy fle name The path and the name of the ray ie to be checked ET Merge RayFiles Two or more ray fles can be merged to a single one This can be used e g to combine spectral ray fles when having obtained a le anda red one The resulting ray Fle has the same farmat as the frst in the lst Cs weighting factor Incase the single source ray fles shall not be taken over equally inta the new merged ray le theusercan weight them byentering itterent weighting factors far each source fle E g when merging Four ray es a weighting ike 4 1 3 2 1s possible The weighting factors do not effect the number afrays taken over om the source Tay fles but the xin then fog readstep function from fle The SPD ofthe single ray fles can be determined either by enter Ingthe values intothe dialog orby selecting an ASCII fle contain Ing rhis data e g a le obtained from the LED supplier Pag force export as spectralray Allows to transform a non spectral ray fle into a spectral one Pie saved either as Lucidshape ASCI or binan using the specified E output roy fle name The path and the name ofthe ray fle which contains the merged ray data button oda file Opens a fle selection box in order to select a ray fle button remove fle Removes the selected fle from the list button change
131. e several identical options and parameters Fora much more detailed description of the options parameters and a short tutorial please see also the separate manual ProceduralSurfaceApplicatons pd available in the same folder as the ther pals as per default LucldShape dae ar via the help button in the respective men entries PS Rectangle efector Raster Reteor sutton Ds Racanglene PS Reter Cane Bare si FF Geometries PS Reflectors in the neo meru E From Geometries Menu Selection PS Reflectors are created trom facets that can be oriented and shaped individually There are seven basic shapes of this type in LuciaShape which anly differ in their specific geometries Just he in the creation of PCS geometries also in PS components the spread angles af individual parts af your optical component can be defined Here each prole ike a facet can be assigned he desired ight spread angles sepa imer dr uie ocn siye une im of weed sotende em im Ea real RBS eal movi qe femel Ses ome I tam sor lice reetvesndasce BT lelpoen i S tcmporis fS Bare spe PS Reflector Dialog Part with Opti Parameters profiles Defines the numberof proles They can be set both far horizontal and vertical direction foreach zane spread pos jangle Inthe case of using near feld and virtual these entries define the poston onthe plane positioned at neared vital distance Othersse they describe the spread angie foreach proi n bo
132. e the finder u shaped cylinder the typical ament coil or the geometrical point source Special nt Sources are an LED point iht source but you also can create a light source rom an external ray fle The skylight source represents the sunlight illumination Ray bundles for ray tracing and fle operations are treated in a separate section because of their Importance for the light source applications The emission characteristics both spectral and spacial can be selected for each light source in Lucidstudio The spectral characteristic can be defined via the Spectral Power Distribution SPD The SPD can be defined by either the colar temperature eg ooo for a halogen tight source or by a step function of normalized emissivity 1 This step function may be sharp or smoothly fied and follows equidistant steps from start o stop wavelength t Is also posible to use a parameterized Gaussian spectral distribution function I you select no SPD the light wil be ated geometrical oniy so without a wavelength or spectral distribution Please refer to Section 7 2 Emiter Materials or the Technical Reference Manual for more background on light sources and their emissions The emitter type classical defines the spacial characteristic The most common source is the Lambertian type A Lambertian surface appears of constant brightness ta the observer independently of he angle of view The ae pe i a weighted tam Deri type where you c
133. eased disk space Saves the UVData viewin focus asa eni le Windows Enhanced Metafile a vector based graphics format Oniy applicable if the iew is a UVData view Makes a screen hard copy ofthe view infocus as a Windows Bit map File bmp ts possible ta save the sereen hard copy as ater common picture types with this command by changing the Sufi ofthe fle Saves the data ofthe UVData viewin focus as a Windows Bitmap Fie bmg by mapping the uv data cells direction bmappiass Itis possible to save the UVData view in focus as other common picture types with this command by changing the sufi af the fie 23 Transferring Geometry between LucidShape and CAD tools The following menu entries are available under File CATA Transfer Solidworks Transfer Rhino Transfer Opens a dlalog see Figure 2 4 The Catia Transfer Dialog to perform a CAD data exchange between LucdShape and CATIA e ACATIAseesonis started simultaneously f not running yet The key approach is to define a suitable local anis system the CAIPart anis system in CATIA representing a transform to be applied to the geometry on its transfer between CATIA and Luc stape See fs for detailed information on how to use this tool Opens a dlalog to perform a CAD data exchange between Lucid Shape and Soldworks simultaneously SaldWork session istante Opens a dialog see Figure 2 2 The Rhino Transfer Dialog to perform a CAD data exchange between LucidS
134. easure like agoniometerdoes I checked measures ike a goniometer Le creates asphere with fadus R centered araund a point G2 which is used as a detector Tor the incoming rays The radius R and the x center may be supplied by the user settings for spectral ay race Seilumination and ight fux sensor 3 Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials 74 2 Ray File Sensor Thissensor captures allrays which are going through the infinity surface Le they have left the complete geometry behind Tne rays are stored therin binary orin ASCIHormat S ray fle name The name and the path of the ray fle e g sensory storage type Switch between ASCI text flor Binary fle Lucidshape format This sensor type can be used to record an own ray fle fram a given geometry Recording the rays gives the possibilty to kind affreeze the randam generator used in every usual simulation That Gray the behaviour atthe lg ource is fully reproducible In addition the characterises ofa ih Source can be passed without revealing the exact structure of the geometry itself The physicalunitstoredin the resulting Ray either Im or JW is determined bythe ag simulate radiometric quantities inthe simulation dialog Peas also refer to Section 8 Monte Cario Ray Trace The use ofa Rayfile Le aer being assigned to an emitter is explained in Section 6 6 hay and Raye Toots 743 Ray History Sensor The ray history sensor can be used to display rays in the
135. ector centerk center center The start point ofthe ray The Sample direction goes from the start center to the grid point Create sample paint grid Creates a sample point grid see also Section 4 87 Create Paint selec point grid read poit rd See Section 4 8 Common Dialog Pars paint cloud name display color pm eidem C ton iheecnior C hanes eben deen E JRESESEETTI sect p Figure 4 22 He Sample Point Cloud from Target Sene dilog 4 8 5 Create Surface from Point Cloud Creates a NURBS Surface from a given point cloud The NURBS data is calculated during the object constuctionby an inerplation or approxi ation algorithm Geometry Create w parametisation fag to create an uv parametrization I not selected the point loud must have t s own values The projection can ether be accomplished with a plane ora sphere spherical projection is chosen the local axis system can be of type B Aor C use smallest uv quod Alag to use the smallest uv quadrilateral select point cloud read point See Section 48 3 Common Dialog Parts loud result surface parameter Surface name display color D P mamske sies ti Mein C ugelde C beC Zoae ue 4 2 Derai of the Create Surface prn Point loud dog 4 8 6 Read Point Grid Thepoint grid data can be read from a data fle or the current implement ation the data fle must have xy coordinates ar xy coordinates n case
136. ed to grid with the given grid size view points This shows all points with their coordinates view mode on The second tab edit points allows to detemine the single points by their three coordinate values A point can be inserted either before anther paint via insert before or after the last one via append Append als is used to create the very first point An existing point can be erased by pressing X a Figure k amp The Create Paine log 443 Create NURBS NURBS are a bit of similar to polylines but with more control ofthe characteristics oft Aca result of that the dialog to create NURBS e nearly the same as for Section 44 2 Create Polyline i degree Determines the degree e the order ofthe polynomial knot count Counts the number of knots ofthe NURBS dex wl be refreshed ater pressing Apr interactive mouse editing view For modifying and viewing the control points see above contrat points view knots grid mode grid size En fdlsables the grid mode withit disabledone can use freehand drawing without restrictions enabled one can define the salu tion of the drawing grid via size so the points of the NURBS will then automatically be ited ta that grid button snapaiitogrid The coordinates ofall pointsare approximated to match the given grasie Geometry 4 4 14 Create Control Curve Create a Control Curve isa tool which can be used for drawing a curve via E ed eer rere AN lin ty
137. el Tree View with marked EVPT gs Alfur lags can be toggled pressing CulaShifsLeter Just mark a shape highlight either tne Geo or the Tres View and press the respective hot key Editable is kind of a protection against accidental changes If unchecked the respective shape canbe examined to see the options and parameters but it cannot be altered To changethevalues Just enable the flag E and apen the edi dialogas usual Vile determines whether this object is visible in the geometry view or not used ta enhance the clarity in more complex models If Pickable is checked the respective objects pick able in the geometry view this can be set off ta make tease to mark and grab single objects The auth attribute is Traceable If checked this object takes part in te ligt simulation unchecked itis nat traced in the ra tace process kind of invisible far the rays not to be mismatched with V in the geometry view Every single atribute can be set independent to the other three Ian objects neler visible nor pick ableitstil takes partin the light simulation as long asit s traceable Getting started with Lucudia 124 Shapes Experiments in LucidShape consist of Shapes A Shape is an abject that takes part In the lighting experiment It may be one ofthe following types Light emitting devices called Emitting Shapes or Lightsources in Lucidshape s terminology Objects that change incoming light by refractin
138. elowthese values areignored in the interactive ray trace srt random rays from Toggle the randam rays starting from either ray bundles ar the light source centers The number af randam rays generated each time the random rays command is triggered may also be set her DI Views m one ann Fami Sse ttn 53 s s deris FF amine FI FF e w j fF pan ETEA Hee E ie TT Bani Pinsel vitans TT P n Bose sete Qe Figure 34 The Ray Analysis Properties Dialog ray path vectors Sets the generated number and coloring af rays each time the generate random roys command s tiggered Possible settings Ae random the rays are displayed in randomized colors direction coded The ray coloring depends continuously on the fay direction intensity Thera coloring depends continuousiy on the ray intensity 3Droy path wavefront images Enables the display af wavefront images at auser defined optical path length This dialog part may be switched on or ff with the Show checkbox Views Camera Properties The Camera Properties option pops up a dialog to set general viewing properties in the geometry View Le viewing direction See the picture and the related table right below FEE pur eimi e P pete sis area C krae Tl crm E de sins E B F 8 Free seer uinum Vide r ri a RE xr vege ae velia m Figure 3 5 Th Camera
139. en and positions itat the right bottom comer of the LuciaShape desktop Open Text Edit View pens another tent edit view for the current modelin focus Not applicable i there is no model in focus Open Tree view Same like Open Text Edit View but with the TreeView Open Geomety View Same like Open Text Edit View but with the GeoView Light Screen View Same like Open Text Edit View but with the light screen view AUVAght Data Views Opensall availabe light data views ofthe current model in focus 12 4 Help Most entries under this menu ofer shortcuts to various LucidShape documents Also a license check may be performed EI Miscellaneous Menus 12444 License Check Lists all licensed modules ofthe current LucidStudio version nthe Mes SageViow there wil be no such output when using the dongle oniyversion va af LucidShape 224 2 Shortcuts to LucidShape Documents The menu entriesinthissection offer shorteutsto Lucidshape document Available documents are Luciastudio introduction Tutorial Macro Focal Application MF Procedural Surface PS Poly Curve System PCS Shell Programming Reference Manual Technical Reference Tutorial Dialog Programming This document mhich is the main document Ashort introduction to the main concepts o Lucidshape this is a good choice when starting from scratch This entry contains a new series of tutorials Among others the topes are the basics of the forward ray trace ma
140. ent or optimization ofthe detailed geometrical aspects of an optical system Consequently the Lcl sudio GUI offers you a variety af commands to create modify and manage geometrical objects The Mody commands for example include operations to generate split merge and in any ather way alter mesh B zier and NURBS curves and surfaces Besides the necessary standard operations to create 3D geometrical objects from mathematical functions ar aut of ather datasets several pre installed functions guide you rough the creation af typical optical geometries Ike aspherical lenses or parabolic surfaces Most ofthese commands Teadyoutoa dialog that will automaticaly offer you toalso choose a material which wil beassigned to the geometry you are currently building see for example Section 4 5 Standard Surfaces You can therefore choose between the three material classes actors ght sources or sensors Thus a complete ready to use shape can be created Instantiy This allows you to quickly create the elements of your experiment without time consuming muti step procedures The detalls of material properties are treated n the chapters on Light Sources Materials and Sensors When creating anew geometry the lacal axis system salsoan orthonormal xy z system However You are free ta define the actual orientation of this local system with respec To the global anes of he experiment and thus orientate the new object upon its creation Some commands i
141. er of tranges for bad surfaces smooth rotational tessellation at poles When tessellatinga Surface near a pole one single point Is a vertex for several tri angles Waclvated tne pole area Is tesseliated much smoother generate tessellation debug fles If activated a debug Mle is generated when performing a tessellation Ts can be used to Analyse problems curve tesseliation parameters This is almost the same as described just above but for curves Instead of surfaces therefor the meaning of the parameters are almost identical left ine width Determines the standard width of drawniinesin Lucdstape this does not alter te ine sel Pag display curves with amaw IE checked ali curves are drawn with an arrow on it this allows to direction see the direction of tne parametrization this might be important It curves are used for trimning button redrow grophics Applies the curent setting to the GeoView in focus Dialog The lags hide views of f checked the respective abject dialog will not show up automatically when opening the mode eg doiog boxes as cid views En disables the possibility to move the dialogs outside the Loc stape frame or dialogs this option 1s selectable views never can be moved outside flag donot remind farsove unchecked LucidShape wil ask for saving al altered models opened fog prompt overwrite existing it checked a prompt wil pop up every time the save function is Ple warning used this is
142. ertex paint The hy perbala is defined by two focal lengths and a pair of start and end radit The surface may be restricted by a start and a sweep angle n the local plan ll angles are defined in degrees and are relative to the local a is Geomety Focal vidual focallength The ocal length of the hyperbola radius min max The radhus range nner and outer radi of the hyperbolaid angle range start sweep The start and sweep angle around the rotation zai 4244 Rotational Ellipsoid An eliptical surface ls created bya rotating elipse The given anis system is the local coordinate system were the profi elipse rotates around hezars The axis origin is the e lipse s vertex point The ellipse is defined by two focal lengths and an ellipse start and sweep angle The surface maybe retricted byan angle rangestart anda sweep inthe cay plane Al angles are defined in degrees and are relative to the local canis cel ength az The two facal lengths ofthe elipse elipse start sweep The ellipse s start end sweep angle 0 280 defining the open diameters of the ellipsoid at either end around z axis anglerangestart sweep The start and sweep angle around the rotation z axis o 3o 4 2 5 Compound Parabolic Concentrator Acompound parabolic concentrator CPC can be thought afas a parabolic toroid Le a parabola revolved about an ars other than its axis af sym metry entry radius The entry radius ofthe CPC extangle The
143. es of the angles ar the rotation ofthe plane Please nate the order Io wich the rotations take place sip ark wih rotation about the zs te x ais and ys are ratsomed into x axis and as with rotation about y y selec feature Select an already esting anis pattern om the geometry reform Geometries Menu Selection F jim C nietaliend racave Imre p pera Figure sui Md Ti Diog radio button no trim selecta Selects the type ofthe trim no tim at all about a trim bound or trim bound ora cuve zeconst a curve or about a plane with a fred rcoordinate piane select im boundoracuve Selecsthe bound curve at which the trim shall take pace fontz tit angle about xy Defines the z evordinate of the tim plane Sets the tit angles about the yas for the trim plane az 820 bt Sn Tg een mwlukSi aty ue dq we BRT WOBE N ron RA OA ROM BOR a a ROECRC E E me RECTE BAT ATT BOR Feat F1 E 2 T wed Facet feds toe F sa nono T Ri ome wate F cel Fire 5 PCS Diog As and Se Part sis origin The cya tupletodetermine the is origin afthe single curves they can be set Independently to eachother anglez This is the angle respective to the x axis the default setting isa distance of go between two neighbouring curves L Determines the angle around the y axis a positive angle shits the curve towards the zaxis p Determines the angle around the xax starzy Defines the starting coordinates for the curv
144. es the position of the amp relative to the street via height overhang and tit angie The data for the projection can be a UWiew in focus a LIDData from the TreeView ar an extera Tle Determines the length the width and the resolution of the road respective street section to be shown and calculated If checked the ID on the road is shown after applying the Test Table One can choose radial no use of cosine oco vertical hif spherical cylindrical or semi cylindrical Chooses either Muminetion flux or luminance ein Ej Analysis of Geometry and LID Data pires LID test points ina UV dato view for a low beam application 9 12 Apply Last Selected Test Table has last been selected by Section 9 1 LID Measuring The command This menu entry otfers aconvenient shortcut toapplythe testtable which works directly on the UV data view in Focus without any further dialog mif Y p a 923 Measure Point or Zone This menu entry offers collection of zone specifie measuring tools which may me applied onthe U data view in focus Apart from the flur calcula ons he reslts of which are in lumen all types ot measurements may be performed in candela lux on somar ha am 26m nisi point measure Measures the intensity at a specific point in the UV data view Supply tne point in the dialog zone measure Measures the minimum and maximum intensity in a specified aone in the UWiew The positions coresponding tothe min and max
145. esutonareni Select here the specific regulation area ike high eam ECE low beam ECE low beam IS ete specificregulation araz Select here the exact regulation for your application Vehicle length In some regulations for side markers the test table depends on the vehicle length to be entered n feet globatscote The LiD Is multiplied with this global scale factor before the measuring is applied he use af this factor is similar othe Parameter glabal scale available in sensar dialogs shitur Shits the light intensity distribution uniformly in the designed ufwalecon og displeytestpoints W checked the test points ofthe current regulation willbe shown Inthe UV Data View fiag road projection Please see the next table and the corresponding picture below legi weno min max Aa dE weshol dg Figure s The UD Measure Dialog I Percentage Deviation Threshald Pag percentage deviation W checked the text output is extended to show the attained per centage relative to the given legal min max ange This extent z t n bean additional column i mast cases or two additional lies when having a matrix measurement for signal beams percentage deviation thresholds Itis possible to define some kind af tolerance using the percent age deviation so the user Is wamed y a diferent color ark Yellow ifthe measured values are too close to the legal mis Using a threshold af 0 10 wil set the threshold limits identical ta the legal iis o
146. ew Properties P4 35 ght Screen View 66 351 GEM CUM erected 352 Display Commands 66 3 53 Coloring and Display Properties 67 Luc studi Users Guide 3 54 Screen View Properties s 4 Geometry at Basi Operations an Geometrie Objects c 4 11 Selection Deletion and Renaming dia Transform m 433 Set Global Anis Xi Comerion of Canes ad Sic 435 Modify Data Structures of Geometric Objects 42 Standard Geometries in 423 Rectangular Pafaboloid sn 122 RotationalParaboloi eas 423 Rotational Hyperboloid 42 4 Rotational Ellipsoid nnn A25 Compound Parabolic Concentrator ae 126 Cylinder ee B27 Spleen 423 Mesh Sphere Le 125 Plane Sore an Dik nnn per M 4242 Box 42 Procedural Surfaces won 434 Rotational Surface e e 132 Pipe Surface coe 433 Tonus PEUT NN 135 btruded Surface ner 43 6 Offset Surface 133 Swept Surface nn 133 Svang Surface x 435 Surface om Formula dde Standard CUES ern 443 Parabola ea 442 Hyperbola A3 Elipse Ls A Elipse by Two Focal Plats oauan aos Helix ane 4 46 Compound Parabol AA Curve from Formula A43 Cuv between tuo Caves cm 149 Cives from NURBS Surfaca Border dct Curves from Trimmed Surface Border uoccan dct Create Point 44 3 Create Pole 4443 Create NURBS oocncocnsannn dci Create Control Curve x 45 Standard Surfaces 4S Surface from Boundary Layers 15 Surface between carve and Point nnana 453 Surf
147. example yourself We wil guide you through this process step by step You wil be able to understand and use some of the Recessary procedures and dialogs intuitively fo you may quickly go though the steps you ready can handle and proceed Other tasks may be more complex and you wil not be familiar With these However this chapter focuses on the creation of he example above I wil not teach You ali tne detalls and the variety of options n Luc Studie Bt presents you a task where you an follow a fundamental design sequence hat is considered representative far the principles of Use of the Lucdstudo software 1 3 1 Create an Empty Geometry File Tosta with we ist start LucdShape and create an empty geometry fle 3 Choose File gt New from the menu and then select geometry from the emerged Document Type dialog A blank window with a coordinate system appears it should be similar ta this Getting started with Lucstudia Foure 7 Empty Geometry View 13 2 Create a Cylinder Light Source Next we insert a cylinder ight source 4 From the menu select Lightsources Cylinder Light Source A new dialog window opens on our screen In this dialog we customize the below ited options and parameters po Veto ssee d Fires Menu s Uohsorces Cylinder Light Sou 2 Let us choose the source position to be buya o o 30 and make sure the z axis ofthe cylinder ia set to o This aligns the rotational anis af the cylinder ts
148. ext edit view Adds the contents of file to the document in focus Uke add but the added fle is selected from a list of previously opened fes 22 Saving LucidShape Documents The following menu entries are available under File The generaltype ofthe objectis determined automatically and cannot be changed e g a LID cannot be saved as a lug this extension stands for a geometry fle Wih a fned general type the suffix an be chosen among a wide variety of dierent le formats oF course depending on tne pe of the respective object A LID e g can be saved as Jid csv Imt es c ete Due to this scanning forthe comet le sufi shouldbe avoided ta havea dat in the fe name A previousiy saved object ike eg a complete experiment a taiem UD t an be saved int tme same e as before Ve overnrting s le An optional warning concerning this verwi ng can be toggled on off in tne options Global Set tine ease note The default fleformatisbinay soto obtainan ASC fle you have to use the Save As ASC entry z Fleand Eat save selected save as ASC save as Mete save as bitmap save vata as bitmap Saves the current data object experiment setup light data ete with a new le name Please see also the note above this table 3nd Section 0 2 Materials Import Export Rhino CAD Saves the selected geometry with the current Nle format and Uke save but the document is saved in a plane text format this requies incr
149. f the light poles via the light point overhang Determines the width af the sensor perpendicular the street this isto investigate the light brought to the pavement and beyond arta ignore that eto concentrate on the diving surface tse The MF isa weighting factor that represents the reduction ofthe luminous ux from a ight source when t has reached the end of its effective lifetime Le the end ofits maintenance cce At this point tminaire replacement and cleaning o th optics is due The effect ofthe MF is not shown in the LID ts only appled When executing the classy function Typically the street direction along the road is specified as thex atls ofthe glabal coordinate system The y anis is therefore across the road In the U S A however the y aus s usually de noted alang the road and x axis across You can switch this definition or convenience Please note Ifthe direction has been hanged the spectator coordinates have ta be adjusted Choose the pole pattern to be two sided symmetrical without offset two sided alternating wth offset or one sided oniy Choose the desired type of illuminance measurement among Normal horizontal standard radial vertical half spherical cl indicat Ta have a deta description about theses yes please refer to the Techical Reference LucidTechnical paf Choos the e af the streetlight LID to be simulated n the road According to the European regulations on street ighting DIN EN 23
150. faces have the same polynomial degree furthermore the respective parametrization o the two surfaces have to be suitable far the merge Speaking af the border curves af the surfaces ez ie tly posible to merge the northem curve of the bottom surface ta the southern cuve f the top surface tls nat possible to have 2 connection between two noth curves merge several cuves Merges either the selected oral curves into one curve EI Geometry lose curves match startsend Performs a closure for the selected or al curves Please note No addiional piece of curve wil being created only the rst and the last segment wil be deformed subrange of NURBS surface Makes the user select a NURBS suce then selects a sub range o i via two parameters subrange of NURBS curve takes the user select a NURBS curve then selects a sub range af via two parameters rebuild NURBS curve Rebuilds the curve via sampling and approximation The given turve is irst converted into a PointRow Then a fitting curve s created by using this PontRow This ting curve s created as a URS Curve Note that the rebuilt curve wil most ikelynot have the exact shape as the orginal curve rebuild NURBS surface Rebuilds the surface via sampling and approximation Firsta point grid is created on the given surface Then a fiting surface s cre ated by using this Point grid The iting surface is created as a NURBS Surface Note that the rebuilt surface il most kel not have t
151. facets When performing a simulation using the Light Mapping method tie possible to ob Serve the simulation result for each single fact This way thelr respective contribution tothe whole UD can be examined Choose m Fresform Geometries Menu Selection Navigate in 30 4D data se in the content menu ofthe ight data window to navigate through the diferent Facets Pag rebuild after calculation Makes a special update of the current settings to the modelin focus ofans Defines the number fares for one facet in each direction degree Defines the polynomial degree of the two base curves radio button smooth Selects the type of smoothing for the curves name color The name and color wil be set e g for diferenation C rotadanai n arge ais aptam C aie oglan patan M Ide S Deere aie 8 8 s e EE n Figure sp Edi Als Dialog dio button no transformation Selects the type ofthe transformation No transformation at all Single auis system axis system a transformation about a single axis or onta an ase system pat pattem tem ame and row length Sets the name andthe arrow length adlo button vectoviangle Defines the parameters fr the transformation are vector ar defined angie defined originxyz Defines the position af the plane p Defines the orientation of the ais in the setting p Defines the orientation of he ais in the setting rotation angles bout Y X Defines the valu
152. file Opens the fle selection box to change the marked ray fle button clear ist Cleat all entries in the ist so that a new list can created button apply It pressed the listed ray les are merged using the entered op tions and parameters Light Sources DEE Eumene ueque Oiart ate Re meighina tatere B A F fecondi fe nae aane fewer Guo tenia Qiu A Figure 69 The Merge RoyFles Diog 6 6 6 Compute a RayFile s Pseudo Focal Point PFP This command computes a pseudo focal point PFP for a ray fle and shows the information im the MessageViev MZ A Given a set of rays anda point one can compute the points average Squared distance fromthe rays set that is thesum ofall squared distances between the point and the rays A ay set s PFP is a point with minimized average squared distance fom the ray set I The resulting point and its average squared distance is displayed in the message view Also the average ray direction is computed and displayed input roy fle name The path and the name of the ray fle of which the PFP shall be computed E Light Sources 6 6 7 Project RayFile on Geometry This tool takes ll rays of an input ray fle computes their projected rays with respect to a given scene and writes all projected rays to an output ray fie Wa given ray intersects with surfaces in a scene the projected ray is defined as the ray with the intersection po
153. folder of your instalation of Lucids haps The maia dialog contains all the buttons forthe further setting Pressing any ofthe buttons except Apply or Help wl open a further dialog far the subset nge LO Ace Quee eoe cem Hee itsme Emere Aidan one Cont tatu awam awan Pax Mny vmes Cwe C nes cem C swn Fre 5 20 PCS Main Dialog m Freeform Geometries Menu Selection trot Wet Seta Fame Pew corres es ees eem C eiae mr ente F noui rca n F nee Ca Cartes F e oo Figure 5 2 Ft Other Dolo raj button FFsuface materiel Defines whether the surface iether specular or refractive button set material reflection coefclnt refractive index fresnel factor extra cole og make outer medium total absorbing fag Ronen plonar surface enter position weight fag always split suoce Pressing the button allows to select a material rom he ray Defines the amount of light being reflected fram o nothing up os perfect efector Specifies these three parameters for a refractor nly Selects whether the outer surface will be a perfect absorber or not e g for absorbing scattered light En disables the parameters to create a front or entry surface Sets the potion ofthe front or entry surface of the reflector Specifies somehow the size this surface whether itis curved or fan The reflector surface is split into its
154. following menu entries are available under ior VE he latter applies for UVData views ony undo Revers the last operation E a Cuts the selected object e copies it to the dipboard and re moves it from the document in focus copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the document in focus copy Bitmap Meta ile Makes a screen hard copy ofthe view in focus and copies tasa Windows Bitmap ar Windows Meta into the clpboard to be pasted into a graphies tool Tis is only available Tor geo viens cony Bitmap and UVData views copy Bitmap and copy Meta Me delete Removes the selected object rom he document in focus tea al Empties the clipboard Bibliography a Lucidshape Cotia Vs Geometry Transfer 3 Chapter 3 Views Boartiom the message view which usually resides inthe right bottom ofthe workspace Luc studio fers you five diferent Views These ae the Geometry View Tee View Tex Script Viem UV Dataview and LghtScreenView They allow diferent approaches to the purposes ef building and evaluating an experiment and affer you different menus with individual commands and options during the processes of design and analysis Therefore each af them gives you a diferent View on your project This chapter describes the specifie commands for these ive views n LucidStudlo a corresponding menu appears foreach type ofview at the third position inthe menu bar and is
155. fraction and Absorption Distributions nnn 219 751 User Defined Spectral Distributions 2 7 6 2 Special Dispersion and Emission Functions E TACTO IDE WB nimii eaaa 7 73 BSOFS ina nutshell 2 272 The Wizard s Dialog Elements E 78 porting other BSDF Data rcc TTL BM 73 Set Colour E 7 30 Set Texture E TS A ehini Sa Monte Cario Ray Trace m 8 2 GPU Trace Simulation 235 3 Ligh Mapping Simulation e Ie 4 4 Side at ie aaa 53 Simulation Manager 2 A Sensor gt Calllons T M 864 QailerSenor gi err rerrrrnrneccsccacreeees ME 62 Reverse Sensor ght E 3 Liminance Image Sensor ligt er TAM A VA CUMBRE iint trerceceepec eter tesacenea T 573 Random Rays am 57 2 Inter 2 9 Analysis of Geometry and Lib ata e TU MM 52 UD Measuring E 352 Apply Test Tables E 332 Apply ast Selected est Table ere TM 333 Measure Point or Zone E 9 2 LiD Modeling 2 Pre Tl arrea aa aea UAR EN n E Luc studi User s Guide 22 interpolate LDS from Test Tables nnn 5 10 Data Conversion 9 34 Surface from iD Data e LC 332 Section Curve through LID Data 55555 94 Analysis of 3D Geometry 544 Bounding Box 34 2 Visualize Volume Sensor Lr roe 343 Restore Rays rom Ray History Sensor 34 4 Ray Deviations and Checkerboard Images 345 Wil Thickness Diagram wae oes 9 5 Benchmark test tol for Teas or self defined assesses 5 Bap Tools 9 84 Bitmap Show ccona 362 30 Snapshot Le so bEditr 46 ier aa aS 102 UD Editor Galley e e 103 UD
156. g Section 23 5 Simulate the scene tne section called Light Sereen View LucidStudio offer specifi sets of rays far the geometry view so you can choose the one suited best for yaur needs For most precise survey of your experiment you may want to use a single ray while spread ie Viewed best with larger bundles As the origin ar alignment of the ray bundles can be chosen 4 2 Cylinder Flament bundle or a Parallel bundle of rays Independent of the exact ray bundle ype you have to assign a set of coordinates to define the origin of the rays the basie yz pos ition Some dialog parts are common to most dialogs in this section Instead of repeating these pars for ever toal we describe them once here shee 8 8 8 wen gure 6 Common Rey ace Bundle Parameters ame The ay undle sidenier offset The ray bundle offset x2 relative tothe light source s posi tion color The ray bundle s calar as displayed in the geometry view 6 5 1 Single Ray Bundle Creates a single ray bundle The created ray bundle starts froma given poston defined by the gh sources position and an optional fst to it The origin aF single ray bundles ie always a point eg the center Boston or a specifie comer of a cylinder light source 6 5 2 Cylinder Filament Bundle Creates a cylinder lament bundle The ray bundles start from a cylinders front boundary The cylinder length radius and number of rays can be entered Th
157. g reflec called Actor Shapes or simply Actors 1 or absorbing it These objects are Light measuring devices called Sensor Shapes or simply Sensors Any shape consist of two properties Geometry and Material To create a shape you have to add fone ar mare material properties ta an already existing or newly created geometry Geometry in LcidShape a geometry object defines a certain region in space t wil be displayed in the geo metry view but unless iie part of a shape i wil be invisible 10 the simulation You can choose ftam a variety of pre defined geometrical objects or create any object you need from scratch Material A shape of light source type is created ifan emitter material property is attached to a geometry For modelling voluminous light sources ike gas discharge lamps simply definean enclosing surface With an emitter proper An actor is also a material property attached to a geometrie surface You can define an actor to be an absorber a reflector or a refractor Refectors can be ideal Le 300 reflectance ar af more Telit quality They can be perfectly specular purely difluse or may provide any ratio ofscattering in between A refractor may either be an Ideal refractor ora Fresnel refractor where a part af the incoming light wil be reflected To model a refractive optical medium that occupies a certain Volume in space define ts outer surfaces with the corresponding refractive indices Transmission
158. g curves points or other surfaces 454 Surface from Boundary Layers Creates a new object using already existing curves as boundary ayers SS EE haamana Teter nolo ae proce OR ere TEENE a oe Geometry deep drowing The Nag deep drawing enables you to specily the vertex z and the wali height running from o to 13 452 Surface between Curve and Point Creates new object using an already existing curve and a single point gt rim curve Determines the curve which wil be used points 9 2 Determines the point used as the cone paint of the new surface 453 Surface between two Curves Creates a new surface using two curves spanning it us stand second curve Determines the wo curves wich will used to create the new ob ect 4 5 4 Surface between two Surfaces Creates a new surface using two already exiting surfaces the red and Yellow ones are thealready existing surfaces the blue ane is the new ne stand second interface Determines the two surfaces which wil used ta create the new object E Geometry 4 6 Lenses This section describes various tots for lens creation Common to all dialog inthis section are the following parameter Blocks which wil not be Usted again In the subsequent dialog descriptions Pease also see the figure just below display color Toe display color for the aspherical lens I lens nome The object s name local anis system The local coordinate system for the le
159. ght Nux distributions per sensor E The sensor surfaces subdivided into n times n cells You can change the effective sensor resolution indirect via the chosen cell size scaled bythe unit facta and he actual size ofthe geometry the sensar material tbe applied to This sensor setup s similar to te one of Section 74 7 urination Lux Light Flux Lumen and Luminance Candela per m2 Sensor Materials For each cell a light fux distribution is set up storing the flux from to different angles The coordinate system for this s chosen om the A B Cyne or from the local axes The angular range ofthe low sensor is set Foralleelisequallyina separately adaressed coordinate system from Upa Unas in Steps of Au Game for v respectively An optional scale Tacior can be used far an overall scaling similar to a sensitivity factor Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials cell see The celt size Gts area is the inverse resolution af the sensor scale by the uni factor Acellste of i aims at a cell area of unit Facto in he imal shape Lucka Studio wil realize dis cretization of he final sensar as clase as possible to the desired els lobo scale A slobal scaefaciorintheintenal olo takea global ass into ni factor Ameter factor which scales the model units e g the value of 0 001 scales to mm milimeters dimension oflightmatiixaeach range inu range inv The min max angles ofthe allowed range cetl u
160. gle between the dierent modes ma Select Tee View yu select an entry n the tree view the object willbe high lighted inthe geometry view LMB Select Data View in data view afer pressing the LMB you enter the value display made Paint ta a postion or move the mouse while keeping pressed the LMB The value of the current postion is displayed Inthe window s entry bar LMB Select Light Screen View In light screen view after pressing the LMB youenterthe position display mode Paint to a position or move the mouse while keeping pressed the LMB The current postions displayed inthe window s etry bar Double click on LMB Select Selecting an entryin the geometry vien Depending onthe modus Geometry View Gor a geometry a shape or a Pivot paint The selected geometry or shape is highlighted SHIN plus Double Clickon Selecting another entry in the geometry viem Depending on the LMB Another Select Geometry modis Sor P a geometry a shape or a Pivot point The selec View ted objects are highlighted TRU plus LMB Another Select Selecting another entry in the tree view The selected objects are ree View highlighted SHIM plus LMB Select Region When you select two entries in the tree view both entres and all ree View entries between them are highlighted LMB Rotate Geometry View Inthe geometry view after pressing the LIB the rotation mode is started Move the mouse while keeping pressed the LMB to rotate the sce
161. gle contrats the out coupling af the light beta angle on prism down The downward slope of the prism its contact angle counted vs the tangent of the spine curve at the end point ofthe prism This Isthe prism facet facing the end of the spine cuve Intentionally this angle gives additional control an the depth and the width of he prism allowing variations such as a sharp sawtooth profile symmetric angle cross section vs an asymmetri Nat end shape Make both angles identical to create symmetrie prisms e Tor woway Muminated ight guide systems gamma angle rotate prism Tris angle rotates the prism base surface normal around the spine around normal curve e Ikea helix Usually used with the contrat curve option to compensate or accomplish the shape of a certain light guide design o etae eB Figure 5 33 An example of the prise ond showing some used bosi parameters This picture right above shows an example setting of the prism band used are only constant entries The dela is set to 10 the gap to s he delta is not defined as the length of each plece but along the spine curve The height is o no offset from the spine curve ais set to 6a ascending angle ofthe single prisms and B to 30 descending angle This easy visually demonstration works among ather when using the option with base surface ere u and are measured against the base side ot the prism triangle and with a light direction vertoraf o here
162. global loss into ons ln fed The sensor can be preloaded wit a constant value e g to simu late some stray light Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials unkfodor Ameterfacor which scales the mode units e g the value of oos scales to millimeters Imm flown men ion somes igual cae ada TN at the correction factor costu s ignored inthis case This feature can be usede forthe bird s eyeviewof automobile headlamps reflection index only for diffuse The factor s n Le the ratio between luminance cd Jand lu surface minous intensity E cforan ideal diffuse reflector One does not have ta divide by n again the dsion is implemented in the cal culation fag emissive surface 1 checked an additional entry will be added to the respective only for Lucidbrive surface or shape When now the model is opened in LucidDrive the this waymodi ed surfaces are glowing This isan optical effect oniy no light is projected onto the raad This is intended to show Ger slightly luminate the rear lights p senis T ort Lase T veliesse BT eee pa p eran s D ETE fis termein atace Figure ya The Huan Light Fu and Luminance Sensor Dialogs Please note The sensor sensor for diffuse surface does have the same physical unit asa luminance Sensor but is not a re luminance sensor This sensor material among others s intended for license plates When the rays are intersecting with the sensor shape this materia
163. gth ofa anges side Lowering this value will force tne tessellation process to create more angles the recreated surface becomes smoother max chord height This is the maximal allowed distance Between the original surface andthe triangle ceste here also 52e the sketch below this table checked the multiprocessing is activated and the number of CPs can be set highly recommended if not more than one in stanceotLucidShapeisrunting on your system at the same time Pressing the button max CPUS wil set the entered number to the greatest possible value as stated inside the brackets When performing simulation with less ras than avaliable inthe ay fle this Nag can be usedto randomly choose amangthe single aye This s important because some ray es are created ina m Simulation Ts spl sensors foreach Hog simulate radiometric quantities Pag simulate more rays keep previous fied number of fresnel eflec tions process priority during simula tion fog details certain order e g the resulting LID is building up in antico Wise direction or the ray fes sorted with ascending theta angle M checked asensoriscreatedfor each source Aferthe simulation has been completed right ick into the LID and choose navigate in 3DfaD data set here one can anale theresult foreach source ofits own and the sum of ali sources together It checked the simulation wil be done with radiometric W in stead af photometric q
164. h surfaces cuves NURBS curves polylines anis systems points mahe unique names Selects or deletes all objects with the assigned type name to be entered in a small dialog f you enter for instance PlanarSur face ali planes wil be selected or deleted Selects or deletes all objects with the assigned name to be entered in a small dialog Ifyou enter for instance surfaces6 ll objects with that denier wil be selected ar deleted Selects or deletes al objects with the assigned color Qo be entered inasmall dialog as 3 numbers representing RGB values Ifyou enter tor instance 55 50 all red objects wil be selected or deleted temativly the user may enter the selection colar Indirectly by selecting one abject the object s color wili be taken as fiter in that case Selects or deletes all objects with the chosen Rag combination Selects or deletes all objects in the scene Selects or deletes all objects ofthe selected type in the scene Generates and assigns unique identifiers to all objects in the modet m Geometry 42 2 Transform This dialog allows to move to rotate to sale tomirororcopy the selec Ted oral objects The following table ists the essential pars ofthis toot dialog Most ofthe tabs do have the possibilty af interactive changes with the arrows the respective amount can be specified via the entries inthe re spective Ine the direct change can be done via the values In the lower partand
165. he higher the density E Creates a plane surface within the XY plane of the given axis system The plane has its origin in the anis origin The surface on the plane is restricted tothe given derecange miny maray These four values define the uwange ofthe rectangular plane 4230 Disk disks created as a cone but with zero length This way the base and top radius of the cone become the inner and outer radius of the disk inner outer radius he start and end radii nner outer within the tocat ay plane anglerange start sweep The start and sweep angle around the rotation sis 4231 Cone This option creates a cone surface within the given axis system The cone is defined bya pair of base and top radianda parofbaseand top heights The cone is extruded into the z direction ofthe axis system The cone may be restricted by a start angle and a sweep angle nthe local ay plane Al angles are defined in degrees and are measured relative to the local ais Geometry baseandtopconeradius Defines the base and the top radius of the cone respectively length from to The start and end position af the cone along the local z axis anglerongestart sweep The start and sweep angle around the rotation uis 4232 Box Bullsa box with the given axis system as local ads system The size is Set by the given sy range minua max yz Tieborsoyz ange 4 3 Procedural Surfaces Thisseciondeseribesthe commands that are available under the
166. he beam Patter even ifthe LID is the same button apply Applies the changes into the model Thelas three buttons zom View Driver s View and Bird s Eye View toggle betweenthe respective View position and direction 1143 License Plate This is an application for the license plate sensor containing the sensor with the test points itself as accessible via Menu gt Sensors License Piste Senso and one or more ight sources The Only nem parameters in this application dialog below are the options and parameters forthe light Sources tat s the number and the exact postioing of them E ihi eorne omoto S C am Cw Combo perin c fe om pr l ES Smoker 00000 RB RF E 5 Geen Sane Toetame LaadCuta Severo CTS Figure 1210 The License Piete Appliation Dialog adlo buton lightsources Determines the number af the light sources to be created For bove plate each one there wil bea full set of parameters to contol them Independent Toy e center source By default the light sources are evenly distributed of course the position the orientation oth x and z axis and the ray fle to be teed can be altered button create source After having changed the number of sources or their parameters press rete source to apply the changes onto the model 3m Applications button test points It pressed the curently selected test table is applied onto the test paint sensor the result
167. he colar display in Star Glyph and Bar Chart representation The anissystem far the vehicle position the postions fr the Ds are relative to this position For a detalle description please Telerto Section 410 Create Axis System pressed the above specified LDs are used to create four bird s eyeviews anda view on a wall The therefor used parameters are Shown in the respective title bar ofthe views pressed two windows are created a dialog for making anas sessments selection pops up see the picture right belon Performs the benchmark test Saves the current settings using the entered benchmark name in the upper dialog part Removes the marke vehicle from the selection it Adds a further vehicle to the selection list Accepts current changes made in the dialog box I checked the low beam assessment is applied If checked the high beam assessment is applied Until now this benchmark is under progress and has not been passed as law 2 2089 Figure gs Dialog box or Assessment Display and Views Selection Driver View shows the light intensity distribution on the road With the dialog box below tie possible to shaw diferent assessments in the street scene Here the assessments Zone A Zone B Zone C Flux and Glare are selected The single tems can be shifted fram the left list to the right and vice versa using the arrow buttons asso possible to showa om view nd a bird s eye vien The fallaing two pictures s
168. he data of the view in Focus ist view muliply Multiples a second sew data bythe data ofthe viewin focus ist ven divite Divides the data f the view infocus rst view by second uv ens data seale Thelight data values are scaled by a factor to be supplied by the user in a small pop up dialog Affects the selected data only tech The ight data values are stretched by a horizontal or vertat postive ar negative factor to be supplied by the ueerina small pop up dialog Affects the selected data only absolute Replaces all values by thelr absolutes negative to zero Sets all negative values to zero regular celisize apis the cell sizes af the curent uv data view to one common Value Useful to regulae Imported IES or CSV LID ies which ow irregular celi sizes Special Views The commands in this subsection generate special LiD data views from an existing Candela LID distribution A views are configurable via the respective dalog E Views Figure 3 5 A Candela ID rom a Low Bea simulation and the specia ews generated pom it rom eo ih diver ew i s eye er sree luminare don Pleasenote Alcoordnatesinthe next two dialogs are the same asin LcidDrive Thex al points inthe driving direction the yanis points to the left and z points up E g a source being positioned at oro a5 s located directiy at the ront of the car xmo a bit to the right yo and at 2 0 625m above the road Driver View The ge
169. he exact shape as the original surface invert Mesh facets Makestheuser select a mesh forall which wil be invented swaps front and back surface e Join Mesh facets Makes the userselctallorjust wo meshes which wil be joined Possibly double points can be deleted 4 2 Standard Geomet This section describes the commands that are available under the menu entry Standard Geometry fering the user a number af basie geometrie creation tools Ali commands starta dialog which merely consists of three parts 4 A dialog part controling general parameters like the name the color and its local anis system See the following picture for an example 2 A dialog par containing entries specific far the geometry to be created Ike the focal length of a paraboloid or the radius ofa sphere These parameters are described n the table below 3 With pressing Create this object willbe created and shows up in the respective views e g Uke TreeView GeoView The first and thira dlalog parts are nearly the same for al geometses Containing both a geometry anda materialtheobject wili becomea shape The Assign Materiais described in derali in Chapter 7 Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials Ei Geomety E Mee owas anang ontossarsty Cop TY pes mes ES BOR mE E 1 l S sarees wget 62 pot mm m e x Qo 3 gue 4 4 The rectangular paraboloid dialog with is hee pars on georricenties com
170. he length ofthe prism along the curve or its width aps between Ifyou look at the prism cross section from the side of he light 2 guide tis measured from beginning to end of the prism along he spine A value of 2 would create a prism with a length of 2 mim along the light guide Using the option cons il create Identical deltas and gaps The parameters entered when using aive are takenas points on a ting curve they always have to be entered as pairs The last choice individual uses pairs of parameters too but the user is free to specify a certain number o prisms to create e one for each pl suface width deft righ Thevalues of width xand 2 specify the width of the prisms across the ight guides spine curve identical absolute values eg sand 45 wilcreateasymmetrcaly wide shape Think ofthis width as the extrusion length af the prism crass sectional curve n case the option for deltas and gaps is set to individual the number of pals for al four input elds hae to be the same height Used to vary the height of prism band above the spine curve additional to the translation see below This is used create a Wedge profile e g for pre colimated TIR opis phe angle on prism up The upward slope ofthe prism its starting angle counted vs the tangent of the spine curve at the starting point ofthe prism This E Fresform Geometries Menu Selection Isthe prism facet facing the starting point the spine curve tionally is an
171. he polar grid size which builds the cone bundle 655 Parallel Bundle Creates a parallel bundle A rectangular grid of parallel rays pases the area around the target point The number af rays in u and v the direction ofthe ray bundle and the o entation af tne grid can be chosen The grid is set up by rici 2e0 ze rays E Light Sources ne lt lt deme Fo mee 8 78 metes B anor dianne D Figure 635 The Pre unde Diog direction Direction vector f r al rays base vector The base vector forthe grid mumberofmsinu v The grid size 6 5 6 Point Set Bundle Creates a point set bundle The rays start from a fned set of points Note thatthe set of points cannat be edited in the dialog which contains only the object identifier as its aniy editable parameter directly The point Sets have to be created by script then they are selectable via the pint Set bundle dialog 657 Parallel On Normal Bundle ETE E TSITEE SETS the surface normal The numberof rays in u and v can be entered The rds set up by ui 240 24 rays The length ofeach start Tayandthe distance between the rays n uand v direction can be entered The ag nto back side serves as a direction indicator and allows to Switch between both sides at tne surface r2 Light Sources 6 5 8 Tip Cone On Normal Bundle Creates a tip cone ray bundle on normal that sto say a ray bundle with a cone of rays around the surface narmal
172. he re spective button ei view properties tnis always opens h Usual properties dialog of this feature Beside the page title this page type has no options parameters tall it canbe used to contain any comment summary descrip tion ete The headline style is very similar to the type UVData page and the font size is selt explanatory Data The upper choice determines the UVData to be used he lower choice the TestTable In boti cases select either the corres ponding object from the TreeView ra fle from your computer This type is suitable for a summary report table of differences a list of things stl to do ete Just enter a string as content and hoase the leve ofthis entry in the table Available types are unnumbered and numbered lists they cannot be mised on ane pore Fresform Geometries Menu Selection extemal document This tast page type allows to include an already existing Power Point fle Into the documentation EE e CMM CHEN gc aa rrr TE Eeen Figure 9 Tao Exemplary Pages ofthe Documentation E3 Chapter 6 Light Sources The light source is one afthe fundamental components of every optical setup Besides the simple point Source tere is a multitude of diferrty shaped ih sources available This ls taken into account within LucidStudio with the predefined light sources treated in this chapter You can choose between classical emitter shapes and special ones Classical light sources ar
173. he road at 25m distance and Lux on the road at dom distance display type forix The display type frau intensity can be chosen among band Itc dootcandie redo button display type Only 150 lines Displays black ISO nes ofa light distribution Color Colored display Gray on white The light distribution is displayed in gray ona White background Views Only color80 ines Displays coloredISO Ines oa light disti bution Color Bands Displays color bands Gray on black The light distribution is displayed in gray ona lack background radio button scene lines Diferent types of lines can be added ke ECE cutoff or road Iines discussed earlier in the UWWiew Menu n case the LiD does contain color informations there are some additional parameters to adjust the view How can the simulation result store in the sensor be shown on the monitor The monitor candisplay 256 channels per color red green blue That means that the LiDData already containing colar informations has to be transformed ar mapped inta these three cannels with a fange af o 255 each inLucidShapethis can be done by choosing among fve diferent typeso tone mapping algorithms They all map HDR Image data ether rom LIDData or an HDR Image format Ike OpenEXR into the range af ow dynamic display devices Monitors Printer etc Tere are three simple mapping al gorithms inear logarithmic and Munsell and two mare advanced anes OpenEXR and Reinhard o
174. he single section curves can be renamed changes are ap lied by pressing ser Determines whether the section curve shall be calculated In hori zontal or vertical direction The position and the range are detem ied by the horizontal vertical position andthe min max values EI Hoa isot Geometry and LID Data assigned LD data button graphic ond fit button redraw grid fog auto grid uje radio button scaling Shows the used LID for this section curve It can be changed by marking a LID and pressing set curent LID in focus pressed a smali dialog opens Here some addtional drawing parameters ike e g the color are adjustable Apply tnis by pressing OK After having altered the drawing area e z move or 200m it can be redrawn using the current settings The valuesto beused forthe grid can be taken automatically from the LID or entered manually This radio button determines the scaling of the grid The default setting ls linear here the grid is drawn in the usual near style The choice og ntensty keepsthe u ais linear but changes the axis Le the intensity to logarithmic The hid choice log log anges oth axis to logarithmic Te following picture shows an example with the original LID from an ECE low beam upper pa a vertical cut curve taken at u 5 alue curve and a horizontal cut curve taken at ve z red The ya section curves are marked in the original LID Fires s Empl of two section curves
175. how the three graphical situations on the road upper and the three different analysis tools lamer picture All assessments are done only for the low beams 35 q Analysis of Geometry and LID Data 9 6 Bitmap Tools 9 63 Bitmap Show This tool displays bmp pictures roma given folder either statically or as a movie ware the display speed can be defined via a timer Interval May beusedto display the bitmaps generated in Section 9 6 2 3D Snapshot forexample E T EPFELER A Prirandenburg tt LucidShape Computer Aided ighting bution sting k v P s default size user size or scale timer intervat Were MT 0k Figure a The Bitmap Show Dialog Select here oneimage in the wanted path to be displayed ng bmp or Jpg The selected image also serves asa starting object fors movie animation Jumps to the beginning of the folder Jumps one frame backward respective forward Pays respective stops the movie Select between the default size original picture size user size applies the specifed values or scale applies e scale factor onto the original sizs Specifies the delay between two sequent pictures in milliseconds 3 Analysis of Geometry and LID Data 9 6 2 30 Snapshot TEE IEE model displayed in the geometry view The views are defined by a resolu m HE a ok E dmm MEE Eoo tEEEICOEDTT ed oven pene amaieren ES E spa FT sea fas
176. ht ofthe light source considered as a point above the Toad surface taken in m light point overhang The horizontal distance af the poing light source to the sideline of the road and perpendicular to the road length taken in mb a Positive value means that the source ts above the street a value equal to zero means that the sources exactly above the ade ne nd a negative value means that the source le places above the Sidewalk tittangle The angle between the vertical z axis andthe light source s main optical anis the orientation in which tne amp has been measured vs he orientation in which the lamp s being installed above the Toad dimension of angular degree ign points Determines the number af identical lamps along the street ext light points The extra light points are additional lamps placed before the centre ofthe axis system Le in negative a y direction To have aque resisti resultin the measurement of te complete street E Applications light point distance street wid sensorwidth maintenance factor ME radio button direction radio button offset pull down menu lumination ype select LiD fle Testing the Streight ere should be at least two extra lamps depending on their dir ectional characteristic Determines the distance between two lamps along the chosen anis ni Determines the with ofthe street from sideline to sideline taken n m nis atso nfuences the position o
177. ialog Each patter gets a name and has a LID fle attached The aiming af this pattern can be selected among the above specified mounting positions Additional the color of Sach pattern can be modified i desired fe aim selection J R P Fees d zi Ew gems sl E r eee Jis i E r Bue jp zi E r Em e Fr me jp sl Rz ial R r Bmw lle s gue 1 2 The Headlamps and Miscellaneous Diog Pos Sets the name ofthe lamps Vi the button the path and the name afa LID le ight intens y alstibuton is selectable Specifies he direction the lamp aims to as declared just above E Applications Inthe part amp sers two or more lamps can be combined to a set o have a direct access to them 4 in a running simulation Again the number o entries can be altered at the very bottom af the ilg sets In the default setting there are faur sets low ih low high and fog It Is able to mount several tamps or sets onto ane car and then tur the respective ight on off via the dialog TampSwtch described below e on adi RUE PAFRPCTOCECFTS TH r rarawcworererern FOr rarsrerogrerrera kr FarsrcrorerrgEGER Figure 12 3 Th Lamp Sets Settings The nent tab allows to mdi the sensar settings EA gue 1 4 The Sensor Settings fag on En or disables the respective sensor Pag Consumer Report posts En or disables the appearance of the CR posts on the road Humination ype Cha
178. ied more detailed W checked itis possible to determine the vertical values to create a non isotropic characteristic The entered values far o 52 10 5 20 define the hori zontal light intensity distribution o the LED athe given angles ifthe Rag oval ht is unchecked these values are used to create an isotropic characteristic Theenteredvalues for o 5 o 58 20 define the vertical light intensity distribution of the LED for the given angles The polynomial degree far the explicit curve built far the emitter characteristics Determines the total ight Nu of the light source m Light Sources 6 33 Low Beam High Beam Signal Lamp and special Light Sources The tots in this subsection create special cylinder ight sources for low beam high beam and signal lamp applications The specifie geometry of each types taken into account mhile the basic properties are those found in Sertion 6 2 Cinder Light Source The subsequent table lists the available types low beam sources Ha H Ha lowshield slows K7 HE Huo i Hiz Hi3 high beam sources signat iomp sources othe special sources 6 4 Sky Light Source law H6 HB4 9006 HB5 9007 low Sx minor shield S2 minor shield 3 018 Ha high Hs high Ho Hi3 High HB3 goo HIR gon HIR 90 3 HBs 9007 high St major S2 major s high Hs high rotated by 80 sg Pig Pag Pra HPS PW Pad up Pas major Ws majar Pais minor P2aWs minor
179. iew currentiy in focus nor other already opened uv Views unless a redraw command is executed subsequentiy Views 3 4 5 Spectral specific options ovigte in 0 40 dot set avigatesthrough a30 4D UVW or UVT data field W and Tare addtional variables tke read cunvaturecr wavelength The UVData Is displayedasa function af additional parameter That does only works the data has more parameters than U and V see the picture right below AM m rn ncm Fem F sate gure 3 20 The Navigate 4D Dok View 4 postion The position within the uv data animation tine The animation time in miliseconds oly play Runs through the uv data in forward or backward direction stop Staps the animation fag mouse navigation it checked one can scroll through the channels by pressing the left mouse button and then moving the mouse lef right or for ward backward 3 4 6 Detailed View Properties The ast entry in this menu Detailed View Properties brings up a dialog for editing data display properties The dialog changes dynamically depending on the type ofthe LID marked In case ofa b with spectral informations e single wavelength channels results in the usual dialog as shown Just below color informations however lead to a diferent dialog shown Inthe third picture below Views Terme Horde BREE sa te D ume E E vem PS E de ne an opu uu E F re ree p Gratan Tue go EE emp pp
180. inition of geometric sources or ray fes Eston Opens the dialog to speci the facer stan Switches Opens a smali dialo toactivate deactivate the facets individually Other Settings Opens the dialog box for settings concerning the handling of patches see belon Please refer to the Macrofoal Application manual for the detailed properties and background in formation an the parameters af MF components E Freeform Geometries Menu Selection Cartel Dots BT IER Pide Y tal Deme ena einn ese A Figure se MF reflector iens dialog other parameters With the button other you access the dialog for further parameters such as listed in the table below Degree tpachesin U V Specly the NURBS degree and the number af patches in u orv direction Pateh ft method Select whether or not to keep size in approximation Solve method Select the cutoff to solve for no cutoff ine older method or best for cutat ine patch calculation sequence Arangethe order af calculation vertical frst or horizontal irst Handling ofrotated patches Select how to deal with orientation default U horizontal spreod depending of patch direc verla automatic swap or the use of a bounding rectangle tony optimize wallthikness Select step size standard 1 and slope angle Umit name Selecta name for the created shape color Define the color RGB From Geometries Menu Selection lawson Dn th o mg e T 9 ite
181. int as start point and the input ays rection as the direction maene Tiei x Figure 62 The Dig pr Projet Ray ion Surface input roy e name The path and the name ofthe input ray fi output roy le nome The path and the name of the output ray fle ad button select projection Selector which determines the surfaces in the model to take part geometry inte projection computation 66 3 Lamp Models for RayFiles The lamp model brary of LcldShape contains a set of predefined lamp models ucidstapelampModels Each lamp modelconsistsofaset fi c af emiting and absorbing shapes One can either create ray fles for B Automotive or general lighting T Rer ru eee 3l When theray fleis created it may be tested the ray e than can be used in future simulations E Light Sources etna ack pt eae ii a ae Ea EEA lett pte Jeune Qon Figure 6 2 The Lamp Model for ay Files Dolo radio button create ray file Switches between the creation ota ray fle or the simulation ofa simulate roy file oniy listing selected geometry fle number of rays 1000 button view lamp model button simulation button test ray fle selected input ray fle ray ie The choice is dane via a hierarchical structure in the three selec tion lists each list is sorted in alphabetical order For automotive lighting there are the main groups High beam low beam and signal be
182. inthe presentation Creates the title page ofthe document here the pre defined strings may be used and or any other tent Selectable are single double and quadruple GeoViews shown areal curentiy visible objects The resolution ofthe single GeoView and the respective background colar can be set for one pate but independent to other pages The distance between multiple GeoViews can be set via the separate Imagesby value km The visibility can be seon olfindependenty for ali Multisurface Shapes Le the main parts af the geometry Single Showsthe GeoViewin the specified viewtype wireframe Shaded or tangles Double Shows the GeoViewin both wireframe and shaded view Quadruple Shows the GeoView the same way as if using the Luc stape 4 main views selection Again the view type ls se lecable Dut identical for al fur views Vat Driver View Bird s Eye These four page types are very similar they all allow to add a View Street Luminaire View text page test table poge iist page page containing the respective feature The headline style can be chosen among the page title the sensor name and both together The name neither is the name of the Shape nor the material but the name of the LDData The image type can be chosen among windows meta fle and bit map The UVData to be used is selected via the pull down menu this list contains all existing UDs The properties of each page type can be set by pressing t
183. ion cuve Knot vector without changing the curve s geometry Used for taining easier control over the cune s B zerarc components modify knot vectrin NURBS Wodiies the number of knots to the surface s parameterization surface land v knot vectors without changing the surfaces geometry Used for gaining easter control over the surfaces B zier patch components swap ond wal on NURBS Swaps the parameters u and von either all or selected NURBS surface surfaces Replaces the NURBS surface function flus by flw verticis on NURBS surface Invents the uas on elther al ar selected NURBS surfaces Re places the NURBS surface function fo yf ga Where i denotes the surface s u parameter range invert vanis on NURBS surface Invents the vis on elther allor selected NURBS surfaces Re places the NURBS surface function a by funwa na where fresa denotes the surfaces v parameter range auto Swap UV XY of NURBS Performs the swap or invert operation automatically in order to surface create a surface with positively oriented normal e dffdu A has postive sign Makes only sense far surfaces with nonvanishing tangents ef du and f v non zero inver URBS curve Invents the parametrization afa curve Le swaps uin uand vice match emerge to NURBS Makes the user select two NURBS curves surfacesina dalogand curves surfaces esto merge them ta ane NURBS eurve surface additionally the oi abjects can be deleted Tis only works ithetwo sur
184. ion of your sensors the celso an estimated 367 to 19 rays are necessary to obtain a realistic result The computing time increases lineal with the number of rays pressed the maximum possible number ot rasis entered While using ray fle the tatal numberof rays In this Hl i applied otherwise there is only a Imit depending on your used system Determines the number of simulation parts the complete simul onis divided into ter each part has been computed the sensors are updated with the respective preliminary result so ne can have a preview to the LID without having 1o walt unti the Complete process s done Determines the number aF surface interactions a ray may have through the scene before tis considered as trapped and thus abandoned This is helpful to prevent program deadlocks pro duced by infinite reflections e a ray inside a mirrored sphere would be reieced an infinite number af times fitis not aban doned Whe using shapes Te e g prism band a higher number is recommended due to the special Behaviour af this shapes If checked the spectral simulation is enabled The available parameters are the number of spectral channels and the spectral z Simulation smi ane p o Toss W Remar For sana e Rm remm EO romaer 8 78 einen ere eh P mN fare fier 5 eran cru Fnac CF etn a ee oy mel T etenesatreedeuce T aralde mer ar hes pm einnbe tee fects B proms nony asro aniston sec oem etl
185. ion the target plane refraction index Specify this value according to your material e g PS PMMA fresnel Determines whether the refraction shall be according to Fresnes law or not refractor scale Determines the refractor scale fog individual I checked the degrees of the center side and reflector part can be chosen independentiy degree Determines the NURBS degree of the curve face Determines the number fares the respective surface is made of sweep angle Beginning fram the start the shape is swept by the sweep angle value eg a value of 120P creates a third of a complete cll inerrodus height Sets the dimension of the colimator to ft the dimensions af the um estro dena Keeping the default value of zero the collimator is created with a perfectly sharp edgeat the bottom Increasing this value results ina plane plateau between the Center red and the Reflector eren flag size defined with This Rag can be used to specify the entent ofthe resulting coli ator either by the height default setting fag unchecked ar by he radius checked fag total height eds This is the overall heh radius of the collimator e g to take a United maximal size into account og with curve extrusion checked itis able to choose an existing curve as the extrusion turve there the two values extrusion frm to specify the Starting postion and the length of the front center The base collimator type s round symmetric this is wha
186. is zonis These values scale the blocks ofthe asis system The scale factor Ibi Stock Scene Visibilty Iehecked the aus system is visible otherwise Is not 34 6 Objects Coloring and Display The frst three commands inthis section open a Windows colar selection dialog toselect the desired background color background color Sets the background colar of the view in focus 3D default background colar Sets the default background color for all geometry views in 30 mode The change wil rst come inta effect when opening tne rest geometry view Iwil neither affect the vw curently infocus nor ather already opened views unless a redraw command is ex uted subsequently 2D defautt backgroundcolor Like 3D Default Background Color but for geometry views in 2D mode black white Toggles between Back amp white and color display Views surface display modes Enables the desired display type See the table in the section alla Surface Display Properties fora description ofthe differ ent types available 342 Advanced Display Properties The menu commands in this section open a property page to set some advanced display options Surface Display Properties The Surface Display Properties option pops up a property dialog for surface display options See the picture and the related table ight below Cs kn Do gle Un lumen az E ECT Cyrene cT E grum Eom aes D menma dem RR epe fume Ce Cue Digi C retia Figur
187. is creates a new experiment also some specific objects will be treated automatically Add some toot depending objects int the experiment eg incase of the BSDF Maker add a suitable scattering surface or when using the Source Position Checker create a sensor surface Specilyanarayofvalues by determining the respective minimum and maximum values pressing un al wili run e simulate al possible permutations automatically altering the geometry tothe current set of value The middle part of the dialogue conceming something like rotation alpha beta rotation theta phi or similar are independent to the just mentioned aray This is only for manually testing or adjusting the setup postion and orientation of the lgh urc before activating Tun all so these values have no infuence on the animation aray Donaterete an obec the dialog wil create automatically eg the BSDF Maker creates its own emiter and sensor and wil not work propery with self created anes 21 3 BSDF Maker This sub section describes the use of the application BSDF Maker which can be found under the mena tem Tes in short Thistool isa rudimentary gonlometer ype experiment to create your own BSDF data You specify a sample material define scanning ranges and resolutions start ray tracing and recording and the simulated LIO is converted It a SSOf dataset This BSDE can be use as ASDF material Tor creating shape with the sarme scattering behaviour as th
188. is section we wl guide you through a simple example of te design of an optical system in LucidStudio Keep in mind that we need at leat three derent shapes one ight source one act and ane sensor We wil build a lighting experiment that consists of one cylinder ight source one parabolic reflector 1 and bwo sensors There are two ways to create this example system You can start a semi automatic sequence of what has to be dane to set up the experiment or you can follow the instructions in this chapter and do ali the necessary steps manually You can run the automated example via the main menu Tests Test Scene Bier tht you may always hit the retur enter button or press the apply button Inthe dialog with every nevi dialog that appears and you wil have finaly created the scene The window that appears after the fist dialog shows the geometry where you see the modelin front view To change the size Dress SHIFT and the LMB simultaneously in upper crease or lower decrease direction You may rotate the model by pressing the LMB and simultaneously mave the mouse inside this window This view Is called the Geometry View The cylinder light source is drawn in yellow ar the color you have elected Ta move the modet inside the window press the left and the right buttons sim taneously and move the mouse fer all dilogs have been applied you can proceed witha Simulation tis more educational to select al menu tems manually and create the
189. ition Determines howto select the BSDF curve select curve reveals an objet selector to pick an existing control curve from a tre view The ASDF wizard is used to create a BSDF curve from material measurements see Section 7 The BSDF Waard 73 8 3D BSDF data from file Reflective and Refractive Bul sa reflective or refractive actor material by reading 30 BSDF meas x urement data in LucidShape id format These contain also lateral scattering information azimuth angle Seleced input BSDFfle Fle input dialog for reading the measurement id data 9 ABg Reflective Act iw Ac adinim x Eu UE E NEN 73 BSDF equation AB and g the coeficients of the BSDF Model formula asoF N Bela pin ANE Ses the Technical Reference for more detailed informations about the mathematic B g parameter The coeficients B and g ofthe BSDF Model formula Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials 7330 Absorber An absorber material A surface equipped with this material works asa black nole for all light rays The corresponding dialog has no parameters at all 7 4 Sensors and Sensor Materials This section describes the various sensors types which are available in LucidShape Most sensors are irom their very nature rectangular arrangements afligt cells and may be attached ta a geometry to count incoming rays Special cases are the ray fle sensor which accounts ays into an extemal fle to bid ray les an
190. ives you access to the sensor data yau have obtained from ray tracing aright mapping The UVDataView menu allons the interpretation further analysis and post processing al your resus by a variety of commands The LighsereenVew shows youthe images of yorlihtsourc Le flament image ona screen treated from ray bundles you define during interactive ray tracing in the GeoView The ghtscreen Ves menu all you to access dierent viewing angles and other view properties br the LightScreenView properties dialog The Messoge View displays all LucidStudio messages but does not have a menu of lts own Alex cuted commands error codes or warnings are shown in this window Views 3 GeoView Fe cre Jer Gomery Fui guste seit Sensor Smaston oie y too vaw Bent The following mena entries are available under GeoView 33 General Commands info Shows information about the model in the message Box SO repone Re frames the value range o the default range afer oom etc reframe selected Like re frame but only the selected objects are considered redraw Recreates and displays the scene ute redraw Switches to an automatic redra Each time you ratate or move he scene by mouse Interaction the scene wil be recreated and displayed zoom inout Zooms in out in smalisteps You canalsozoom in out by moving the mouse whee in upper lower direction ar by using the SHIFT and the LMB while moving the mouse up down 332 Selection Modes With
191. ke the group af Procedural Surfaces requires the selection af one ar more ex isting geometries as parameters To create an extruded surface for example you choose a cuve To be translated along a vector you wl alo have to define Ater that you may create the final surface geometry from these parameters Note that some of the dialogs that you wil use more often e the Transform dlog are suited o be left open on your scree so you can access them again for repeated application ofthe same command This way you do not have ta re open the same dialog again and again for each abject Jt yon chaose selected objects instead of al objects in a dialog it wil affect anly the shapes or geometries you have selected when you press ine apply ton Aimastevery objectin Lucidshapehas four Attributes or lags Editable 8 Visible V Piekabe P and Traceable T All four Rags can he toggle pressing CtrisShiftsLetter just mark a shape highlight either the Geo or rhe TreeView and press the respective hot key Editable is kind ofa protection against accidental changes If unchecked the respective shape canbe examined to see the options and parameters but it cannot bealtered To change thevalues Just enable the lag E and apen the edit dialogas usual Visite determines whether this object Is visible in the geometry view or not used to enhance he clarity in more complex modets If Pickable is checked the respective objects pick ablein he ge
192. l behaves like a perfect diusa surface These scattered rays now are counted into the sensor Emitter or and Sensor Materials 74 8 Luminance Camera The Luminance Cameras special sensor type You can simulate the appearance of your design tothe human eye The Luminance Camera Sensor captures the luminance images in your experiment ke a real lu minance camera would do a location ta look at Ao Is possible to define more than one position and make the camera shoot images from several diferent angles mlt Postioning tn coast to oiher sensors you ave to dene 2 ington nd A E The image field of this camera sensor the ual analogy to the CCD or phote dode array of a digital camera Wh and height are its physical dimensions a rcm 0 ree lin comm a reentert esee sense 0D X Ros onim es ehane C aE Figure 7 17 The eniance Coner Dialog D sensor nome The name ofthe luminance camera mage resolution forall camere Defines the image resolution in horizontal vertical direction The aspect ratio af the sensor image is taken from the fld of views othe GeoView radio tutor settings f r spec This effect of this radio buttons deta to the one inthe usual tral channels candela sensor The sensor can ignore spectral informations n count the light Ito the single channels or directly convert the recorded data nto the XYZ farmat Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials menne pana RU eg
193. l surfaces ar only the selected surfaces Inthe target scene E grid sample method A selector far the sample method with direction vector Al rays are created trom each point with a given direction The rays wil intersect with the frst surface Inthe target scene The intersection points and the normals are stored in the rest pont cloud from sphere center Each ray starts rom a given start center and goes through the pins The rays will intersect with the first surface in the target scene The intersection points and the normals are stored inthe resulting point cloud direction directionY direction The sample direction vector center center center The start point ofthe rays The Sample direction goes from the start center to the grid point Create sample paint grid Creates a sample point grid see also Section 4 87 Create Paint Gd select pointgrid read point grid See Section 4 8 Common Dialog Pars C dinane C odece natoer TOE CI soe such e a Fue 4 25 The Sample Paint Gri ron Target Scene dialog Geometry 4 830 Create Point Grid on Surface A point grid with n by m points in U and V is created on a surface number ofa points ia V The number of points in U and V direction select base surface point grid See Section 484 Common Dialog Pars name display colar 4 8 12 Create Fitting Surface Fits a surface through a regular grid of points The surface may be either
194. laserike beam wheres a very high value means almost parallel light Please also refer to Section 6a Base Options and Parameter Tor botn a declaration and a sketch af Wi Please note The value HWHM only determines the strength of scattering of reflected ight either reflected ona reflective Surface directly or as Fresnel reflection on a refractive surface The transmitted ight is scattered due to the settings for the WM 00 but also Influenced by the wo refraction indices Thesetwo parameters determine the reflective behaviour forthe ABg model Almost the same asthe reflectance described just above but this time for the refractive actor again the scaling value has to bein the intervat fo This value determines whethera certain quantity ofthe incoming light shall be reflected doe to the Fresnel equations the value hasta be in theinterao3 wth eg 0 0 means na fresnel re flection at all and 1 0 the fresnel ection fully activated s Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials medumzandmedimz An incoming and outgoing medium defining an interface ot efratve refractive index contrast e g a lens s behaviour via Snel aw Typical media are air far the incoming medum and glass or the outgoing medium to define the illuminated face of a glass lene The outgoing tace ofthe same lens would be defined bythe Interface from glass back to air Any refractive object surroun ded byair can be defined in LucidStudio thl
195. learn about the different Vies on an experiment that LacidStudio offers The available mouse interactions and special properties of Lucistudi wil also be addressed Let s start with a glance at the terminology Getting started with Lucudia Whether you consider it a scene you are setting up or an optical system you want to design Whenever a complete setup is approached tis called the Experiment Every experiment consists of active parts and sometimes also passive parts The active parts are visible to the simulation and are participating in the outcome of the simulation e g ray tracing passive parts are not gt VPT The active elements are called Shapes in LucidStudio So what are shapes A shape is a combination af geometry and material so this object has a form and a behaviour n LucidStudio Thus the shape sone of the fundamental concepts of LucidStudio and s discussed in detail in the following sections Passive parts af an experiment do nat influence the outcome fit directly They canbe data you stored ar material properties you designed forlater use ar anything else Basically Wwe divide everything that s part af your experiment inta shapes and non shapes The Geometry is another basic concept Every active element you want to design must possess ageometry in order to exist The geomely is therefore a property of any shape It can be a 2D or 3D geometrica abject like a curve or a surface or a cylinder but also a
196. light screen view E House interaction Reference C4 UV Lightdata View r SMET M CTRL SHET LMB ame Scroll Wheel in amp Out Hold Scroll Whee Cs Text Edit View une SHIT B jus C6 Message Box un SHIFT B jus Displays the angular coordinates and the sensor values under he mouse cursor Zooms in and oust within the LV Light view Zoom in on the rectangular region selected Activates the context mena Zooms in and out within the UV Lig tdata view Pans the UV Lightdata view Inserts the cursor into the teat or selects the text Selects multiple characters af test fom fist cursor location to the end location under the mouse cursor Activates the context menu Inserts the cursor into the tent ar selects the tent Selects multiple characters af test from fist cursor location to the end location under the mouse cursor Activates the context menu EJ Appendix D Efficacy Scale Factor and Rhino CAD Im Export Daa Efficacy Scale Factor The efficacy factor in Section 72 Emitter Materials is used to adjust the luminous power of emitter shapes In Lacidstudio to correctly reproduce the output of measured real lit sources Areal ight source a butb lamp LED has a Socket connects a housing shields shading wires that means there are mechanical components blocking certain spacial angles and reducing the luminous power af the bare lumination e g the flament he arc or the emitter surface
197. linder surface in combination withalightemiter material As per defaul the cylinders created symmetrical tthe za e ubi Cepeda en ime BR fo Figure 62 Details of the Cylinders Light Source ig length The length ofthe cylinder radi The wo radii of the cylinder Using two identical values creates a circle as base curve otherwise an ellipse s created Light Sources 622 Disk Light Source This function creates a disk surface in combination with a light emitter material Partial disks and rings may be created by specifying an angular range different tram oo and a nonzero inner radius ene angle range start sweep Theangular range in degrees 0360 the full range inner outer radius The inner and outer radius an inner radius o creates a ring ellipse factor Itsetto s acirdle willbe created as the base curve otherwise an elipse mith the given ratio is created 6 2 3 Plane Light Source This function creates a planar surface in combination with a light emitter material Eo Figure 42 Deas ofthe Plane Light Sure Dialog minz maxa The horizontal range af the plane miny mary The vertical range ofthe plane Light Sources 6 2 4 U Shape Light Source Thsfunctoncreates an u shaped light source n tatal this geometry uses three adi one to deine the prof radius of he circle cross section of the torus and two ta define the torus or shape The two sweep angles gt define the
198. local z axis parallel to our lota as Getting started with Luddstudio EN T sone arc Eme e ae ndm jaje rs pr E o E Ert m Ocem Qua Figure 9 The Cinder Light Source Dialog with the customized Options ond Parameters 3 Set the length tos and theradiito ass 4 The default display color for ight sources s yellow 2552550 of course it can be modified via changing the three numbers af the RGB code or select the colar table via 5 Check create ray bundle at the bottom with the ray bundle far interactive ray trace dialog to e able to do interactive ray trace later Alternatively with grid on touch surface you could create a u by v grid where the rays touch the surface But for now we will use the ray bundle ony 6 Now switch to the right tab of this dialog as emitter type we choose a lambertan emitter and set the Tur t 1000 m 7 Enter a source name let us take Cylinder Light Source and click on Create Ater pressing Create the geometry view wil automatically be updated It now contains a cylinder positioned atx o y 0 2 30 We see the model in ront view sa it should ok ke a circle lease ote what you see in the geometry view s its geometrical part Le its surface The ight sources 3 Getting started with Lucudia shape andit is represented by a surface plus the attached emitter property To check that take look at the tree view You can open it via the Menus
199. losses however will not be modelled They may be accounted far by using a scale factor either with the ight source the refractive material ar the sensor You may also apply an absorption Coeficient to the refractive material to model transmission loses You wil find detailed descriptions fon the creation of available actor material properties n Chapter 7 Emitter Actor and Sensor Ma terials There are several types of sensors available The main ones are luminous intensity canda il mination ux or light Nux umen sensor Sensors consist of a number of equally sized cells dis buted scos the supporting surface The resolution of the sensor ean be chosen By increasing for decreasing the number of celts Also certain data les can be treated as a sensor 3 Getting started with Lucudia 12 2 Views The experimental setup can be approached nsx diferent ways the section called Model TreeView the section called Geometry View the section called Light Screen View the section called UV Data View the section called Script and Text View the section called Message View Model Tree View zm Peer Hg yo EO same BO neret cout Dope BO torrente aoe Epes Figure Te Model Te View uith marked EVPT fags Inthe model ree view or imply the tree a textual representation afall objects in the setup and alites hierarchical dependenciesare displayed The Figure 12 The Model Tree View with marked Ever
200. ly rays that hit the sensor at this point with a smali radius wil be displayed in uv rectangle A rectangular uv area Rays that hit this area wil be displayed in uv polygon region A polygonal uv area Rays that hit tis area wil be displayed The polygon may be ether entered via ts nodes wich wil be displayed in a ist then or regions spec o automotive regulations ike ECE Rsg FOG ZA fara og lamp may be selected directly rom a pull down menu E of Geometry and LID Data restore for light source ys per ight source restore for sensor button clear rays button restore rays at index Each ray in the ray story sensor may be selected ety by its index starting from o Please keep in mind that only those rays can be restored which havebeenrecordedby the sensor Le which are within the sensor selector which may be used to restrict the ray reconstruction tospecifie light sources The default setting is Alto get rays from alight sources ata time Restrict the number of reconstructed rays for each light source Adjust he number to a compromise of enough rays and clarity Ifyou use more than ane ray history sensor at atime select here the sensor fram which you want to reconstruct rays Clears all reconstructed rays from the current model s 3D geo metry view This is automatically done when pressing restore rays Reconstucsthe rays rom the selected ray history sensor and displays them in tne current mo
201. man ll dialogs in is Section geome entes end dialog window aptior EI Geometry 42 Rectangular Parabolold Creates a rectangular paraboloid Te given as system is the local co ordinate system af the rectangular paraboloid The ands origin is the paraboloid vertex point If the two focal lengths difer from each other the cross section wil become an ellipse The surface is restricted bythe iven yrange miny maray The rectangular zy range in the local coordinate system focallength xy The facal lengthts of the 2D parabolic curvatures in and ydir 422 Rotational Parabolold A paraboloid surface is created by a rotating parabola The given axis system Is the lacal coordinate system where tne profile rotates around thez axis The axis originis the vertex point ofthe parabola The parabola is defined by a focal length and a pair of start and end radii The surface may be restricted bya start angle anda sweep angie in the local xy plane Nl angle are defined in degrees and are relative to the local x axis Focal tength The focallength ofthe parabola radhus min max The radius range er and outer radii of the paraboloid anglerange start sweep Thestart and sweep angle around the rotation za 423 Rotational Hyperboloid A hyperbolic surface is created by a rotating hyperbola The given anis System isthe lacal coordinate system where the profile hyperbola rotates around the z axis The ands origin is the hyperbola s v
202. mathematical parametrization ofthe shapes surface Du to the calculation process in general this isthe Tost tme intensive simulation method Triangle Here the shape s surface is recreated by triangles their size is determined by the given tessellation parameters Gee below The ray tracer starts a ray from the emitter and Computes the intersection coordinates Le which o the tri angles ishit by it Next the ray s deflected due to the material af this shape using the normal of the hit tangi Mined This the combination of both NURBS and Triangles here the surface is recreated by triangles too Again the ray tracer computes the angle which is hit in contrast tothe method Tange the intersection coordinates are not taken fram the triangles surface here this point is projerted back onto the original shape s surface This slightly increases both he accuracy and the simulation time needed for this method There are not THE values ane can enter fora erect Le corect simulation Before performing a simulation aways press Apply to see the effects of the curent settings in the GeoView In case the surfaces da laok deformed or strange try adjusting the values Inthe dialog Perhaps the maximal numberof ausilarynodeshas tobe increased Section 12 2 1 Global Settings minimal edge length This is the minimal length ofa tange Side This lower Umit is needed to prevent too small ranges maximal edge length This is the maximal alowed len
203. me 4 8 16 Create Skinned Surface Horizontal Vertical Creates a surface from two NURBS curve rows the result is projected on a selected surface curve selection list projection surface Press select object mark the wanted curves in the TreeView then press selection done Ts has to be done separately forthe horizontal and tne vertical lst The resulting surface wil be projected on this selected base sur fce E Geomety 4 9 Ray Deviation Correction Computes a ray deviation correction lens Fra given star surface a ray direction staring point a starting distance and a refraction index this function computesa neutra lens Thats second correction surface is computed in such a way that light rays with the given direction pass the ens shape consisting of the base surface the second surface plus the medium defined via the refraction index without changing ther di ection base surface The start surface fom which a second surface should be created stort uy The nial surface parameters specify the starting point of the a amputation in relative surface coordinates For example ums Stats the computation in the middle of the base surface refraction index The refraction index ofthe medium between the no surfaces initial thickness Thalia distance ofthe two surfaces atthe designed uv surface parameters colculotion step size The numerical step size in u and v used for the calculation ray directi
204. menu entry Procedural Geometry fering the user a number af tools to constract surfaces Irom given curves 434 Rotational Surface Creates a general rotational symmetric surface The given ais system is the local coordinate system where the profile curve rotates around the Z axis The surface may be restricted by a start and a sweep angle Inthe local plane rotation profe curve Thecuve to be rotated angle range star sweep Start angle and sweep angle for the rotation ellipse factor The ellipse factor Le the y x ratio of the diameters local asis system The local coordinate systemafthe RotSurface Referto description under Section 4104 Create Axis System Geometry 43 Pipe Surface Creates a pipe surface A pipe surface may be used in ber optics It isa 2D circle swept along a spine cuve profile cuve The curve which should be used to create the pipe radius The radhus ofthe pipe This dialog creates a torus surface within the xy laneo the given anis System The size is determined by the proe radhus and a pair of radi The tarus may be restricted by a start and sweep polar fo and azimuth langes alt angles are defined in degrees profile radius Determines the radius f the torus body ellipse rodiixy Determines the two radii ofthe elipse base area Le the base curve ofthe torus start sweep angle Siart angle and sweep angle to este oniya segment ofthe el Ipse 434 Coll This dialog creates acoil su
205. n in units of Kelvin A control curve can be selected from the geo view or tree view See the dialog part select function in Section 7 6 Spectral Reflection Refraction and Absorption Distributions fora deserip The spectral power distribution function is defined via a step function af equidistant steps See the dialog par step funcion in Section 7 6 Spectral Reflection Refraction and Absorption Distributions or the LucidTechnical pdf for a description Te spectral power distribution funcinis definedas a piecewise linear function ofequidistant steps Le a near ted step function See the dlalog part t function in Section 74 Spectral Reflection Refraction and Absorption Distributions Tora description A gaussian control curve can be determined by entering the re spective parameters Aer creating the emitter the control curve parameters are stil editable Amn And Anay specify the wavelength range peak a sets the location ofthe cuve s maximum value the location must ie in the wavelength range fuli width ar half max FWHM species the with o ihe contrat cune Degree ares npare used to spect the Gaussian curves polyno milapproximaton Degree the polynomial degree arcs the umber af polynomial arcs a value of means this number is w Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials determined automatically and np the number of points used to approximate each arc rom Sci fle Instead of e
206. n to add a complete directory to the job Uist Press one ofthese two buttons to delete the curently selected entry pressed the simulation dialog opens up pressed one can select the simulation method Pressing this button wil start the Simulation Manager starting With the first erary in the job lst Pressing this button willstopthe ray trace process Theresulting Tie is not writen but the job is stillin the st Press this button to select the path where the resulting e shall hessved One can alter the path and the file rame of the resul directly in the input feld Pressing this button will apply the changes Simulation 8 6 Sensor Light Calculations The sensor light calculation commands use a different approach on col lecing sensor data Instead of starting at the light source and following the patns af diferent rays these methods focus on the sensor and wack ray directly back tothe source Thus they wil neglect optica components A E 3 64 Gather Sensor Light Perorms a sensor light gathering this command has no parameters or options at all This method may be applied for a scene where all sensor objects are ata far distance to the light source with respect to the light source s size The ight n each sensors directly gathered from sach gh source No effects ke reflection at other objects are taken into account So there s no contribution of optical components e mirrors The sensor wil see only the ight sour
207. nabled the sensor wll count only those rays whichintersect the sensor plane within an opening angle The program calculates the angle between the sensor celi more precise the normal at this Intersection point and the ray iis smaller or equal than the entered value which is the radius af this cone the ray is counted in the sensor otherwise it wil be Ignored One can choose either a cone which is orentated along the normal of ths cel or along a specified direction vector isomerate Com C ardro adseo EI Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials How to add ray intensity when used as Exit Sensor This adio button allows to toggle between three diferent modes Incoming simple detects all incoming light which is intersecting the surface theenitsensorisassigned to outgoing stands forthe ight wbich is leaving this surface either refracted or reflected In casethe surfaceis notideal e g a reflector with a reflectance smaller than 1 ora medium with an absorption coefficient larger than o there is a difference between the incoming and the Dutgoing amount of ight his can be measured using the third mode Incoming outgoing he 2 yout on uand ae Et S Settings for spectral ray trace The spectral settings can be deactivated i only performing non specta simulations If set ta split light spectrum nt channels the sensor wil be split imo a Humber af wavelength channels and each incoming ray will account far the
208. nced distributions af points on he surfaces difficult which n tur leads oun anced and thus inaccurate simulation results Ao light mappingis not capable af accounting for E Simulation 84 Si stay light which cames directly from he sources Far many pure reflector setups however ight mapping wil give a reasonably accurate and very fast impression ofthe final result Baman T p I vitrea ert fidos F Useraioncears crus T me crus o O aw Que Figure 8 4 The Light Mapping Diog ofrays 000 The number of rays which should be used far the simulation consider possible facet shadow Standard light mapping ofa elector surface ina madel does not ing detect shadowing fects for example another surface absorbs parts of light rays from the source If this ag is enabled the light mapping i enhanced in such a way that t checks fr such situations Nate that thi slows down the simulation Split result sensors foreach sur The result sensors are split into separate channels according to fuce he number or surfaces The fist channel holds the complete simulation result ofall surfaces and each following channel holds Only the result af the single surfaces These light distributions tan be examined using Navigate through UV Blocks under the edata s context menu ulate by Spooler Temal processes another step further and alaws the simulation af your The LucidShape simulation spoler caris the idea of simulating
209. ndows script so it has na acces to the paths specified in the Lud Shape n fe Open command windowinthe directory ofthe startspooler bat and exactes bat le within 7 Now switch to the frst PC to become a Cent Enter the name ofthe Sever PC into pool Server Computer and pres start cent Repeat this or every PC which shall contribute Now the setup has been finished and simulation jobs can be added from the Serer PC After the initialization of the spooler has been done and the first job s enqueued there are two temporary folders created below Spoole afer ali simulations are done and the queue is empty these two sub folders may be deleted Please note Due to security reasons the assignment of clients to the compute not be done from the Server computer network may can 8 5 Simulation Manager The Simulation Manager is a bit similar to the spooler but with a few differences obs are not added on the Niy ram a currentiy open model the jobs are added as saved lug fles E Simulation Dipa ane ie Fesser SE arrow buttons button add fle button add directory button remove fom ist button edit setings button change method button store button stop button set Fire The Simulation Manager Diog These two arrow buttons can be used to manually sort the arder ofthe simulation jobs Press one of these two buttons to add a Jug Nle to the job list Press this butto
210. ne SHED plus LMB Zoom Model This combination starts oom mode in geometry data and light Geometry Data Light screen view Sereen View Zooming in movingthe mouse upwards while keeping pressed ISHID and LMB Zooming out moving the mouse down while keeping pressed SHIED and LMB SHIED and CTRL plus LMB To draw a zooming rectangle press both SHIFT and CTRL to Zoom Rectongle Geomemy amp gether withthe LMB Releasing zooms with the rectangle as view Dato a Light Sereen Wew Available in geometry data and ight screen views TRU plus LMB Interactive Ray This combination defines an interactive ray trace Alight rayis Trace Geometry View emitted tom given start point s The iniia direction othe light rayis given by the ines from the start pois to the point af the surface the mouse points to Ithe mouse points into a geo metre region no light ray wil be emitted VETRO plusDeubleikon Freezes the curent traced ray path LMB Interactive Ray Trace Geometry View Getting started with Lucudio Middle hee Mouse Button In geometry or data view you can pan move lft ight and or Left and RMB Panning Geo up down the scene by using the middle mouse button or the metry amp Data View let and right button simultaneousty In both views this is atwo dimensional movement on a plane parallel to the viewer SHED and RMB Geometry Pressing the RMB in the geometry view while holding SHIFT View Display Coordinate Sys
211. nerated LID shows the UVData the driver would see from the driver s position on sie a onta Doct incon Wo G3 pos meri sseclgeemtonasn itt s emi p e Hi BR R Boo mue E heels VaR Yt clas ees E Fa m fe Bi 2 vade E Len Gies et tot Figure 336 The Diver View Dialog 7 Views Pag single source souce sj og minor stand radio button DData driver postion view direction tit rotation roll angle back woli size x yif ight ew cl size feid ofview button Inset into model Alcus to use either one ortwolightsources Determines the position of the respective light source using the above explained coordinate sytem In case of using two lig t sources ane them can be mirrored by activating the respective fiag the other LID willbe ignored The LID to be used can be either an UWViewin focus a LID stored Inthe TreeView or a LID saved as a fle rom left to right Determines the position af the deve Parameters ofthe view direction relative to the default ooking Straight ahead Determines the position ofthe aiming wal coordinate andthe size via Yar 308 Vagn The cell size of the generated view Determines the oV Le the size af the view to be generated A four values are given in degree W pressed the feature s added to the TreeView Le It becomes a part ofthe model The generated UD shows the UVData which would be seen from a position zom above the road E
212. ng path via the button Open the model you want to simulate and create or select a simulation feature The output file shows the location and rame where the fleis saved aher the simulation has been performed Pressing Updote wil show ne defaut path and name bot can be altered Pressing enqueue remote jab will add this current jab to the spool queue More precise a small scit fleis created which will trigger the real simulation when called After all jobs have been added to the queue switch to the tab spooler control Pressing lst will Ust all jobs wbich are currenti in the queue The buttons start and sop will start stop the spooler Le the local simulation ofthe jobs 7 Pressing clear wili clear all jobs enqueued This procedure is nearly identical for the second possibility The two paths specified have to be identical but the spooler is stated only on the remate contrailed C The lacal PC is used anly for adding jobs t the spoot queue The third setup is a bit different and works as follows xs Simulation onthe local PC to become the Server open the le Xsampleslspoolerstatspoolecbat ina text stor ut no with Windows notepa se Change the string spool Into the spool path to e created thls is the spool root queue path already specified the subfolder pools The result should look similar to this WSERVERO path poole spoolQueue Replace th string sh with the complete path of tha lshxe this bat script s a wi
213. ng shape better use the possib ty to create an offset geometry and assign the sensar to this surface This additional surface can he seen as kind o a second ayer of the refector but the geometries not ing upan another and thus there is na problem with the order ofthe single intersections A physical and mathematical concept of surface properties reflection refraction scattering transmission absorption can be found in the Technical Reference Manual MucidShapeidocilu Technica df 72 The Dialogs Create Material and Assign Material There is one dialog for each af the three groups of material Emitter Actor and Sensor Each of these dialogs contains several predefined materials Tor the respective type af behaviour When pressing Apply the new material is added to the experiment t s shown as a new entry in the TreeView isted in the folder the whole fle now it can be assigned to a geometry In order to creste a new shape Emene EE Figure 7 2 rom eft o right Emitter Actor and Senso Types The Assign Material dialog is used for assigning a material either an already existing one or one just ta be created to one ar mare geometries There are several options to specify the geometries Which shall be combined with the material to create a new shape see the picture right below Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials mm DE dem Er ee Figure ys The part apply to of the Assign Materia Dialog C secre o lad a
214. nges the method the sensor detects the light For a detailed explanation ofthe single types and in whieh cases the use ofthe sine conection is recommended please refer ta Lucid Technic lp within the LucidShape instalation celsi The sensor s cell size in m Asmallervalue increases the esl ution and decreases the Blocking lengthywidth The length respectively the width af the sensor both in m ux scale This factor alows to take a global lossin account Ike e g absorp tion ete button Apply pressed a simulation with the current settings is performed Applications Thetab driver view allowsto set the driver s postion and create a UVData diagram with a luminance image cd m wbich i wnat the driver would see on the raad They also ser the eld of view ama ers ric hien ic din Pes nm olm ET Pee EO HO RR mE l gue 1 5 Te Driver View Sling driver position yz ets the position of the driver view direction tit rot Sets the driver s view direction ilt and rotation in degrees feld ofview Species the feid of view tabe shawn in degrees horizontal and vertical button create driver image W pressed a UVData diagram for each beam type is created and updated The tab virtual beam allows to modify the virtual light source position and LID properties forthe reverse sensor light calculation I creates a virtual beam patter which could have been used ta create the Mlminaton in al sensors
215. nits in degree af the low sensor ight distribution on each cell The angular data ts stored in a separate light matrix delta in uv Thesize ofeach angular element ofthe ight distri bution affecting the angular resolution angular 1D equivalents ofthe cli The low sensor may be used later to calculate the luminance fed at dierent viewing angles The spherical coordinata system forthe fow sensor is typically selected as an A system se the Technical Reference since the optical ats is always the z axis by LucidShape standard In certain cases Ike the flow through the curved outer parts ofa lens surface itis necessary to use a local ands system Otherwise ali the light hat propagates at angles differing by more than the selected ima values fram the optical axis wil not Be measured tt possible to have an asymmetric pening angle a Cono crier cone temi at 4 ears n opening ape atse pup tatiana TAT mien reser idm decer dn wane EB FR m BB FE pl C vpek Knoe yoso C apeCZme rade Clete cai p nen Fare 735 The Light How Sensor Dialog E Emitter or and Sensor Materials 74 6 Exit Sensors Exit sensors are sensors which may be attached to shapes in arder to nlect ight that exits the shapes during a Monte Carlo ray trace simula um tion Three types of esit sensors are avaliable Now sensors ray fle sensors both available via a common dialog and volume sensors available via a dialog ofits own
216. nna dup Fare 7 3 The sign Materia Diog Geometry Part Here the geometries to be used can be chosen and the name of resulting shape an be set In this part af the dialog the general behaviour of the material can be chosen You can select ne ofthe three basic types Emitter 1o create ight sources actar to create reflectors orlenses and sensor to create light detectors and then chose from a t speci to that ype With the tab selected it is possible to assign a self created material with the last tab ane can choose a material from library The third part is specific to the material type selection in part wo These dialog parts will be explained n detail in the subsequent sections Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials The base difference between the Create Material and the Assign Material dialogi that the first only creates a material and addet recy to the model or futher use wil the latter creates a material and adds itto a user selected set o surfaces or shapes fo cesta new shapes wich are intumadded tothe model Assign Materialthus requires ane or mare existing geometries toassign Additional there is a separate dialog Create Medium This dialog can be used to create a medium and iater on replace an already existing medium in a shape Iis not meant to create a material medium which can directly be assigned to a geometry Whentheassigningpracess seems noo work Asusual please have a look into the MessageView
217. nput format radio button selection mode inclination angles lcidshape ond csi selec fe button cerit button ler selected og measurement red Hog Function over normal variation een og Average a elon rado button Fiter measure radio button Abscissae axis Sets the fle farmat for the BSDF data import Available formats are ASTM REFLET ASAP LucidShape and csv ls Determines the mode how iles are selected bythe usertoappear n the Fle Ust ad fles is selected Single data fles may be entered ane by ane f whole directoryis selected a directory may beenteed andali ofthe les inthe directory willbe added tothe fest The inclination angles can be used to add a constant shift onto the input anges The number of values to be entered has to mach the numberof fies in het the values separated by a bank character The fle or directory selection dialog Removes ali fites from the current list Removes the currently selected e from the Uist If cheched for each data fle in the input list a control curve is generated each one is centered around the particular data set s Input ange If checked for each data le in the input le lista control cuve is generated from the measurement curves via normal variation These curves are centered around the o degree s ifehecked computes one BSDF control curve from the previously described curves This curve may be used in subsequent steps to konstruet actor materiais
218. ns See Section 403 Create Anis System material properties The material properties af the lens Possible values are fresnel Switch to Fresnel retraction This switch is not available for allens types refraction index lens medium outer medium The retraction index far the ens medium and the outer medium absorption coefficient ens medium outer medium The ab Sorption coeficient tor the lens medium and the outer medium feo fers E ey ott rm aaa Ex me amos E E m nw Tw reme E I 3 s E eem p pe Figure 4 0 The dialog parts como al less dialogs n this sertion 4 63 Aspheric Lens Creates an aspherical lens with the optic either on outer or iner side The given nis system s the local coordinate system forthe lens The lens is created as a NURBS surface The lens may be created as a rotational lens withan inner and auter diameter and a start and sweep angle asan extruded lens with a given width which runs fom sar width to end width anda length om start length to end length as an rotational extruded lens with an inner and outer diameter and a start and end length oras a tarus lens with a given width a lawer and upper radius and start and sweep angle The output angle defines the angle ofthe outgoing ray The refraction Indexes and absorption coeficients for the lens medium and the outer medium may be set independent E Geometry Anasphericallens has a curvature that changes contin
219. ntering the values manual a complete fle can be read Each line inthis fle has to contain two values the Wavelength A and its relative itensyintherange o separated bye aspace character ora semicolon The whole fle hasta be saved as ASCI 73 Actor Materials Diferent actor material types can be created or assigned to the geometry in order to make a shape Some properties repeatedly occur in reflective and refractive material types Many parameters are common to most or even all reflective and refractive materials a fact which results in identical dialog elements Instead of repeating tne description of those elements every time they are listed and explained in the following table for the SPD please see the section right above ee een mme FI PETAT aene Cuvesn 43 0 m 1 B Bee 7 7 Some conten options nd parameters Jo a Reflective Acter rrira as ee am m mee em E cae ed prem e iai as i se ae ed en T med ei gre 7 Some common optians nd parameters ora Refractive Aiar E Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials reflectance spectra reflection distribution theta og variable parameter over heo surface roughness holf width at half maximum 77 Bg parameters reflective scale refractive fresnel refractive Determines the amount o ight to be reflected the scaling para meter has to be n the ntenal oa value of o o refers to a perfect absorber a v
220. nu The following menu entries are available under Textew update Ifthe text view is the representation of another view and data have been changed the fle is reinterpreted and ali views are updated with the new data from the edited text view execute Executes the current script Fle the program output is displayed Inthe message og view et font Opens a dialog box where one might choose the text font syntax highlight Makes a syntax highlighting text backgroundcolor Allows the changing ofthe background color within the text view Infocus r7 Views tthe tent view contains a script fle ts also addressed as Scripte script is executable within LucidStudio and therefore differs tom the text representation of your experiment displayed inthe text view 34 UV View When you are using the UVDataView also the usual Flt menu is replaced with the UVEdie menu Here two further options for exporting the results are available Copy Metal and Copy Bitmap rie donus Gemy furi phorum Mrd Sewer Seuls Thefolowing mena entries ae 34 2 General Commands mfo restore fom Simulation Result kefome Re frame Selected view Duplicate View Polar View Candela Gd S Lacon 35m Gd Saxon som Figure 3 9 UV Data View Meow availabe under vView Shows information concerning the UV data e g range minima and maxima The Information s plotted in the message box It pressed the original result rom the simulation i
221. o be used and to enter the names af hen The short names appear n tne nent tab waus Jot er _ a T antowan RAr feed a emen gREEREES a ramets B nn Figure 122 The UD dor Lond Ds Ple names The name andthe path of the LID file which is used When pressing tne button the usual fl selection box opens short names The short name of the LID fle in use They appear in the edit section as the denter in use LID umber of bs Te number of LID les which wil be used t corresponds to the numberof entry ines inthe dialog button update Applies the changes onto the dialog box e the number afines 10 3 2 Options and Parameters The options in this dlalog part determine the availablity of the single parameters in the tab edit LDs and whether the tab dynamic sets i available or not E ubtdior pd en ee Ue Teen oet F ereman oasis wre ae T T onm I apre E bd dow Ue fom T rna E cmm Com one Von nse debis ln ta iure 20 3 The Et Options and Parameters Pag with stretch fiag with shit og with rotation fog with scale og with miror iter Pag symmetry in u fog symmetry inv Pag with rood fog show al Lids number of sets imes button Update radio buon x pole y pole ie n a porn Hai Vae Wea lan checked the stretch in use dialog boss enabled checked the shit in uv dialog bx is enabled If checked the rotate z dlalog
222. o mezsurngama Determines the radius of the measuring area in mm number afrays zooa The number of rays to be simulated in the ray trace internally multiplied by too button apply It pressed the changes are applied onto the model button simulate ali pressed automatically all available inclinations are set and simulated each result is saved in an own sensor button read geometry W pressed a le selection window opens Switch to the folder of the sample Me and select either tre reflective orrelactive sample shape button test points If pressed the retro reflectance s checked accordingly to ECE and SAE regulations For two diferent viewing angles the meas urements are compared with the regulations in the range 20 20 degrees in horizontal direction and 2 to degrees in vertical direction 212 General Application 2124 Aircraft Lighting This application allows to estimate the required beam pattern of aircraft lights The sample leis located at jsamplestacrattighisisetup us his application makes use of the method Reverse Sensor Light explained in Section 86 2 Reverse Sensor Light In our scenario the irat wing the engine andthe logo on the fn are required tobe urinated with aconstantvalue of 20 Ix So the task nowis to estimate the required beam pattern of twa headlamps which ilminate these aircraft areas exactly with the wanted amount of Humination The le setups creates a scene consisting of a wing with t
223. oen aba denonedas E E orsinpy Wih a macron above min mox E Applications z be u w n s The displayed photometic values are those of E E Ez Evins UU TI The vertical luminance is measured on the oad test orata levet 1 5m above the road surface ass The minimum value OFF is supposed to reflect for example the recognizability ofroad sigs The hall pherkal luminance is measured at road level The semi cylindrical luminance is measured at the road surface level test or atan elevated level 15 m above the road surface classify Measurements of E provide a measure ofthe human ably to recognize faces under the measured streetlights This isof Higher importance in cy areas The uniformity of the luminance from the road is calculated via the quotient of average and minimum of each lane separately The displayed value classi isthe smallest value foundineither iane The overalt uniformity af the luminance is calculated via the Quotient of average and minimum af al test points on the road These are not required by regulations but can assist in design and evaluation The longitudinal uniformity af the luminance at the center line ofthe road alang the road is calculated via the quotient af min mum and maximum ofal test paims at the centerline These are not required by regulations but can assist in design and evalu The longitudinal uniformity o the luminance at the center Iines along
224. ometry view this can be set offto make it easier to mark and grab single objects The fourth attribute Is Traceable checked this object takes part in the gh simulation unchecked itis nat traced n the ra tace process kind of invisible far the rays nat to be mismatched with Inthe geometry view Every single attribute can be set independent to the ther three ifan abject isneither visible nor plkable it stil takes partin the light simulation as long as t s traceable detailed description ofthe commands and their required parameters for valid execution are listed inthe following sections ofthis chapter Geometry 4 1 Basic Operations on Geometric Objects This section presents basic operations on geometry Ike selecting moving converting etc 434 Selection Deletion and Renaming These options allow the selection or deletion of objects via several fiter parameters which are isted n the subsequent table These commands Bre avallabie under Geometry gt Select and Geometry Erase respect ive You may enter the type name inthe dlalog box ye enter for instance PianarSurtace al planes wil be selected em Make Unique Names generates and assigns unique identifiers to all objects in the model This command is avaiable under Geometry gt Make Unique Names by type name byname bycolor By EVPT attribute E il shapes ctor shapes ight Sources sensors roy path bundles surfaces NURBS sur faces mes
225. on Chapter 5 FreeForm Geometries Menu Selection nts section we treat the so called Functional Geometry tht is avaliable in the main menu They are representations ol selected design applications making use of feature casses The fol lowing commands are available under the menu entry FunGeo We also cover special structures for reform surfaces such as prisms or dot matrices which are used to create light pipes or backe lighting devices 5 The menu entries for FunGeo MF Reflector olen Base Grid Anis Pattern Tube Lamp for Design Feature Sensor for Design Feature Swich Board for Design Feature Pes Reflector TiR Lens PCS Reflector Lens with PS Curves PCS Reflectar Lens with PS Curves pes lens 1 pes Shield PS Reflector PS Lens PS Reflector iC PS lens Ps Reflector curve PS Lens Cue Colimator LED Lens Prism Band far back light in light pipe Dot Mask or back light Reto Reflector Genetic Algorithm Optimizer 7 Mert Function 7 Parameter Space Explorer Design Feature from old Config 7 Model Note Model Documentation Fresfom Geometries Menu Selection Aten main buttons and options are the same in all afthe above FF geometries These are listed in he folowing table Aly reste the optical component using the current parameters a Hep Opens up the appropriate chapter of a manual New Copy Create anewentity ofthis component opening another dialog n specify the
226. on I s d Figure 730 The Volume Scatter Dialog 0 seater selected thevolume scattering is deactivated this isthe default setting mean length 1o extinction event Determine the mean free path afa ray between two intersections absorption relative ta extinction Quotient af absorption and extinction thisis the relative absorp tion to alt extinction events extinction is the sum o absorption and scattering The value to be entered has to be nthe iterat Toa a value of e g means that absorption s the oniy reason for lass flight in the system E determines the main direction anddistibutionof he scattering vale o 3 for example indicates a mostly isoradiant distribu tion with the forward direction emphasised complex refectveinde particle The Mie scattering model uses a complex refractive indes to be entered as two values hy ny price radius The radhus ofthe scattering particle in nm paricie number Determines the particle density as quantity per cubic milimetre lambda When performing a spectral simulation the function depending on the model is used this parameter determines the value for to be used when performing a non specal simulation Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials Technical amendment Henyey Greenstein in LucidShape Figure zs Menyey Greenstein Scattering Madel graphical Using the notation ofthe graphic above the Henyey Greenstein modelis implemented in LucidStudio as ollows vy and vaut are
227. on The ight direction Le the direction af the incoming rays check thickness ofer computa Switch to enable the creation of a thickness map during the sur tien face calculation At the designed uy starting parameters the thickness should equal the gen initial thickness name ofthickness data The name ofthe thickness map umber ofpentsinuuy Thenumberafpointsinu and u direction used forthe thickness map shape name The name ofthe shape that represents the lens create shape W checked creates a lens shape containing the base surface the computed conection surface plus the medium defined via the hen refraction inde result suface parameters Common surface approximation parameters see for instance Section 43 Common Dialog Paris 4 10 Various Geometry Tools po i sy heey tty ee FEE Fre 46 Tie Ray Deviation Comertion dialog 4304 Create Axis System Crates a local ans system in Euclidean 3D coordinates can be used ta define the position and orientation of geometric objects ora scaling in 1y or z direction axis arrow length origin 2 aris xodsxy sel p M Treidenier of the object Tre length af the axis arrows in the Geometry View display Theoriin yz of the coordinate system The z asis ofthe system The Vector 0 indicates that the 2 as isthe optical atis This anis points In the optical direction The atis ofthe system The xals should be perpendicula
228. ong anis is achieved by averaging the data values of two points each with the same absolute coordinate u and identical coordinates or vice versa forv symmety The obtained average value is then reassigned to both coordinates y 9 5 Views Miscellaneous Operations Note that the application of the arithmetic operations Plus Minus Multiply and Divide requires two datasets which have to be selected by the user These can be pwo different beam patterns for example The two data sets do not have to be of same size In wich case tne largest data sat ie the size of the new data set post operation The application of these operations to scalar values is im any case valid Far multiplying a data set with a scalar factar the scale command within this menu can be used instead Ta apply these operations proceed as follows 1 Set the first uv view into focus 2 Select the op eration to be performed 3 Select the second view to perform the operation The result of the chosen operation wil be directed Into the first view that was selected in step In consequence ne originai contents of heist view will be replaced with the new result LucidStudio uses forward notation as written in case af the operation Minus for example the above 2 sequence leads to a term af the type rst view second view result vien pus Adda second uen sdatatothe data ofthe view in focus irst en minas Subtracts a second wview s data from t
229. ont shape yelow incase ofa round symmetric colimator two optical interfaces must be defined The front entrance andthe sie entrance Light coupled in via the ant entrance experiences retraction and propagates through the medium af the colimator Light passing though the side entrance is thrown at there fector where intemal reflection occurs at the refractive Index Interface with the surrounding air Figure 5 24 Te diference between divergent Defi and convergent ight io Inthe twofigures Figure 23 The parts ofa LED Colimator and Figure 5 25 Parallel collimated Light one can see how the spread parameters are working and the difference between divergent and convergent ight Inthe left case the parameter values 20 20 was used so the ight is spread rom ac eft side of the left picture to 20 ght side of the Ief picture this s called divergent On the right side the parameter valvesare 20 20 the resulting light behaviour is called convergent because the rays are crossing each ather afer exiting the collimator E Fresform Geometries Menu Selection ue 5 Prae eotlinated Light With the values far the center spread set to zero the front center cllimates the outgoing light to a parallel ray bundle hey are spread homogeneously from o 00 Figure 5 26 The vituat Pocol Poet Alay start at the center af the collimator at o0 solid orange lines and are deflected by the Side cente
230. orthe reflector This defines the geometry Next we want to assign a property to this surface geometry We want the parabolaid to reflect in dent ight in LucidStape s terminology we want to attach an actor material to it This will rese an actor shape Getting started with Lucsudia gare The main ila for Geometry 4 To do this we swith to the second tab material in this dialog Within we serol down menu we choose ideal Specular Furthermore we keep the defaultValue for reflectance the value means perfect or ideal reflection 0 losses We apply this by pressing Create Maw aur geometry consists ofa light source and an ideal elector 1 34 Create Sensors Next we want to see what lighting effect our device has thus we definea st and a second sensor 4 To create a plane geometry choose the menu Geomety Standard Geometry Plane The dialog window for plane geometries opens up to same extent similar to the one for the parabat ld We want the plane to be parallel to the plane of our global axes system and located S250 to do IHS enter these values to tne respective parameters Origin sa uso zais yz ooa xis ya t2 Ayame Bean acSo Thas the global zaxis ts the also the direction othe normal vector ofthe gener ated plane Getting started with Lucudia 2 As we want this plane to be a sensor we press Create Shape switch to the sensor tab and hose Sensor fo
231. os and wide scattering angles Lambertian refractive materials in LucidShape scatter the incomming ray after the retraction with a cosine ditriution The maximum ofthis disti bution is aligned with the surface normal of the refractive surface not with the expected direction of an ideally transmitted ray no impact of Sal s tami Ts s diferent in the Gaussian Model where the outgoing ray obeying Snell s law is marking the center of the scattered light distri bution Usually this type af behaviour is faund only on strongly diffusive materials such as miky glass or materials with heavy volume scattering e g using paints Alambertan materialis intended to be used only with high values ofthe WHI angle standard setting is 60 twil show unexpected behaviour for small WA angles e g 20 combined with non normal incidence in combination with other materials can complete a so called combo material adding a diffuse background with invariance to the angles of incidence to any optical response from a material see Section 7 3 6 Lambert Gauss Combination Refective and Refractive and following Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials 734 Gaussian Reflective and Refractive Asurface with a Gaussian material reflects resp refracts the light witha Gaussianintensity distribution This works similar toa Lambertian mater ial but the distribution function is represented nat by a cosine but 3 gaussian cune 73 5 Gaussian
232. ounts alithe sie Pt model ft objet extend light crossing th respective voxels this is the default setting The three modes fax ortho xz are working like a lue sensor Le they are counting the light crossing the respective plane of the single vases The mode absorbed flue visualizes the absorbed light eig in media with an absorption coeficient a Specifies the size andresolution ofthe volume sensar xni Xun Jie Youn Znin 304 Zn ae the coordinates of the sensor box Delia xy determine the resolution fone cell in the respective directions Unir factar supplies the basic units of the box 0 008 Stands for millimeters Creates box with a fitting range for the complete model Creates a box with a tting range far the selected abject Like At Model Object but wil not shrink the current volume sensor s bo switches forselective incoming Using the mode absorbed flux the refraction index has to be set ys according to tne medium where the absorption takes place f not specified the volume sensor anly shows data for the default Value of the refraction index whichis 1o E Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials M SS Be om e m m m TB on m m Ld rare ated sod ics Tee andarooo etd acs Bn onem F retirees po TT Figure 74 The Volume Sensor Diog 74 5 Light Flow Sensor The light flow sensor collet the light ow going through the base surface The How is stared In several angular li
233. owing sections Sellmeier Dispersion Function Creates a dispersan function according to the Sellmeier equation This is an empirical relationship between the refractive index n and the wavelength lambda for a particular transparent medium It determines the dispersion af light in a refracting medium The below displayed equation is used for glasses itis created in form af a ControiCurve en Faas FEED am aoe fo aor Fire 7 26 The Sellmeier Function Dialog Sellmeier coefficients The Selineer coefficients hich are experimentally determined degree Determines the degree i e the order af the fiting function of points Determines the number of paints the iting curve consists of lambda range minimax Determines the wavelength interval to be used 1 Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials Schott Dispersion Function Another form to calculate the dispersion of a materia is the Schot equation whichis especially used for Schott glasses The curve is created sea ControlCure FEE ORT eos dr exp dE ESX e pNmu Figure pp Tie Schott Function Dialog Schott oefcientsay The experimentally determined coefficients far the Schott equa on Cauchy Dispersion Function The Cauchy dispersion function is a special form of the Schott equation above Oniy three coeficients far the exponents o 2 and 4 are used the Testis omitted The curve intemally is created as a control curve E conehvendionrbAR EN
234. ows the pixels ofthe image are sorted her luminance in ascend ng odor depending on the upper cutoff value a certain percentage of he pels with maximal brightness are ignored far scaling the utpitimage g avale of 1 causes the fst of the piel with the highest brightness to be ignored for scaling the output ape Inanalogytotheupper case the given percentage ofthe pines with minimal brightness are ignored fr scaling the output im age Please note The given percentage indicates heamountof pixels tobeignored Le the number af entries in the ordered t tdoes not ffc the brightness range directly E temere fa jy E 4 s e m J 19 na oo Fun F Fe ES ie s j w e 1 _ lt Fd Tt Figure 3 4 The HEV Tone Mapping Dialog low This ad a glow effect to the tone mapped image glowthreshol Selects pelt be involved into the glow ect Eg low threshold SoM means that only pixels witha brightness higher than 80 af the maximal brightness willbe used for glow glow radius Defines the glow radius around each involved pae for glow effect and thus the area to los slow intensity Scales the intensity of the low effect E Views Resizing and Range Shifting shitronge pensa smalldilogto enteruand shit values to shit the data range Note Ifyou shift a uv range with angular coordinate
235. parameters o this second component separately Sole caplet of an cnc paama c be nl Sap E pest po Edit the local anes system ofthe whole component origin and orientation 5 2 MF Reflector Lens Surface This FF geometry createsa reflector or alens from a NURBS grid ara paint grid using the Macafocal concept The material properties can be selected fora reflector or a lens imer outer opties Reflectors re Quire a coefficient af retraction to be specified standard Lenses are specified via refractive in dices ner outer the fresnel factor and a scale factor Iis also possible to select a surface for afix lens side monano S araor C mentem C origi n anle ppm FE OC m mE Bie se MF Reflector lens Dialog Reflective pacte Materia E From Geometries Menu Selection Inthe grid layout settings the base surface and its positionare selected Also the number affacets is chosen here You may mirar an incomplete grid e g one quadrant ony Ee T4 ERE C ce Figure s MF reflector lens dialog grid layout The MF specie dialog buttons are listed below Pe es es m rue mie st cae Mevo tee Figure ss MF reflector ler dialog Dialog buttons ops Opens the dialog to define the gaps between the facts Spreads Opens the dialog to define the spread angles rom the component Source Speciy the source stings Including the selection of standard light sources as well as he ee def
236. pe ine width Sets the type afthe Ine and the width of selected type fiting type Sets the iting type to approximated unused or interpolated polynomial degree Determines the degree of the polynomial smoothing factor Determines the used smoothing factor interactive mouse editing view Offers the possibilities for editing and viewing the control curve ing mode grid mode grid size En fdlsables the grid mode with it disabled one can use freehand drawing without restrictions Its enabled one can define the Solution af the drawing grid via size and then the paints af the tonto curve wil automatically be ted to that prid button soapalitogrid The coordinates fll points are approximated to the grid with the given grid size valves u ange min max Sets the min and max for the range in u drection values ist of values n v direc One may alter the control points in v direction tien Sv fle range min mox Sets the min and max for the range in u drection Sve csv Selects a control cune Rie with the specification ofthe decimal mak reframe Performs a redraw ofthe current settings 3 ueri mom RXSEWAWENUE ee Eesti ROTE eg Esc i iure The Create Cota Curve dileg 4 5 Standard Surfaces This section describes the commands that are available under the menu entry Create Surface of fering the user a number of basie surface creation tools Te user wil be able to create surfaces fram already existin
237. point ight sources emit the light according to this LID Aher loading the fle you shouid first switch the geometry view to Display Light mode n arder to see the luminance on the walls in D You find the switch in the context menu oF the geometry View Besides the JD view you may check out the illuminance in the two UVData views one far the oar and the othe for the three walls Two more candela sensors one In type Cand the other In type A collectthe candela distribution afthe source The results should look the same as your input do You may read in a new li fle via the fle selection control and as soon as you choose a new fle the gh gathering started and you see the new luminance Ifyou use a blank string for the fle name a LambertEmitter is used instead fa LiDEmitr You can also alter the light postion and the sie af the room Applications 11 2 3 Street Illumination The street illumination application in Lucite is a versatile tool to display the light distributions om streetlights within a road scene It consists aF two parts the street simulation and the reverse calculation he stis the simulation oF an imported LID im the defined road scene The second however allows you to reversely calculate from your specified raad scene to obtain an ideal LID which laminates exact the defined road surface with a pertectiy homogeneous illuminance From this you determine the perfect candela distribution for your road scene Geome
238. points can be selected om thetree view Grid selection Uke above but point grids have ta be selected in both cases a istis created which contains the selected points point gids This ists used forthe point dioud creation display color point cloud name See Section 483 Common Dialog Parts LL Fork Pon Dnt W Jp coe n ee ni Figure 4 2 The Create Point Coud dialog 4 8 4 Sample Point Cloud from Target Scene Creates a new point cloud from a target scene The tool uses ali points in the startgrid as start points and shoots rays Into thetarget scene In order to get a new point and normal The way this is done is controlled by the sample method ag use sample surfaces grid sample method Aselectorwhetherto use all surfaces or only the selected surfaces Inthe target scene A selector far the sample method with direction vector Al rays are created trom each point with 23 given direction The rays wil intersect with the ist surface inthe target scene The intersection points and the normale are stored in the resulting point cloud Geomety from sphere center Each ray starts iom a given start center and goes through the pins The rays will intersect with the first Surface in the target scene The intersection points and the normals are stored inthe resulting point cloud from triangle vertices Creates a point cloud from triangle ver direction direction direction The sample direction v
239. pproximation method border offset Afactorforan offset at the border the final offset is facte Urange in direction and factor Vrange in direcion Used only in the approximation method nursing aonb n Pissing C pit oos C cu tin onl er aca EE Cert tock C eres Anis systems see Section 41 Create Anis System for a description 4 82 Read Point Cloud The point cloud data can be read from a data fle Far the current imple mentation the data fle must have thex y coordinates in one line There may be any lphanumen text between the three numbers This text will Be skipped when reading the fle lt 7 Select point loud fle See Section 48 Common Dialog Parts 4 83 Create Point Cloud Creates pint cloud via point input point selection or grid selection or paint input the x2 coordinates ofthe points have to be entered The Selection methods offer the possibilty ta select points or point grids from the ee view Geomety Doints 2 fr Pont Cloud Here the xyz coordinates for each point are entered points grid selection ist update tear ist select Defines the number af points to be entered A corresponding number af input fils for the coordinates appear as soon as up date is pressed The selected point grids are displayed inthis list Updates the dialog according to the number of entered points Al entries in the list are deleted Point selection pressed
240. ption under Seaton 4104 Create Als System 7 Geometry 4 8 Approximated and Interpolated Surface This section presents various tools far point grid and pont cloud handling including surface ger eration via interpolation or extrapolation E Some dialog parts are common ta most of the tools described subsequently Instead of repeating hase parts in every subsection we only describe them in detail here 4 Common Dialog Parts object s colar and name disploycolor The object s color as displayed in the Geo View name The object s name NE mg RW _ interactive selection of objects grids surfaces select object Enters the object selection mode to select an objet fromthe Geo View or the Tree View SM se impor of objects from external fles read object Reads an object from an external fle The fle path may be entered via a le selection dialog a Parameters for interpolating approximating a surface from discrete paint data approximation interolation Selector for the approximation interpolation method degreeinuv The polynomial surface degree numberofpatchesinuv The number of NURBS patches to be calculated used only for the approximation method Geometry smoothness in uv selector for the smoothing ag point tangent or curvature Used ony for the approximation method smoothing factor factor for controlling an extra glabal smoothing Used onlyin the a
241. r If these deflected rays would be traced back framt outside the object without the de fection dotted black Iines they are heading to one point the virtual focal point marked in blaci This point is called vital because only from the outside the colimator this point is seen as the emiting point s Fresform Geometries Menu Selection Figure sp The whole Colimator with Center and Reflector Here one can see both the Centerand the Reflector and their respective ight deflection the values for the spread angles of the center are set to o o G thereby the rays outgoing rom the front canter form parallel light The rays outgoing the side center are spread by the elector In a range of 3a to 3o due to the parameters entered far the reflector 2 The opposite way does wark as eli just change the parameters far the center and tne reflector AS a result the outer part othe ftant shape pellon emits paalel light while the inner rays are spread From 30 ta 3o catarge harme aee Jaren turtcenereny Fon tepant BR e _ modem scan B RR JF 24 Que Que sens stim owe 5 28 The LED Colimator Dios tab for optie parameters og font centerentty Determines whether ont shape shall be added to the center WEM focatpoint The focal point ofthe curved front center entry This should fit the emitter s center alignment Fresform Geometries Menu Selection center spread
242. r lumiation nthe scroll down menu in the detector setting we se he calisize to and keep the rest ofthe default setings Press Create to create our lux sensor 3 Nest we create aluminous intensity distribution sensor Select from the menu Sensors Candela Sensor Use the default values and confirm them by pressing Create a candela sensor is cre ated nme Diete weet toc O upe C Zoe IST i m i e ia T esa Figure st The Candele Sensor Diog Please note this cd sensor differs from the b sensor it is neither attached to the plane you Just created nor any other of your geometries The candela sensor requires an infinity surface geometry check tree ew Thus ts not alowed to assign the candela sensar to an arbitrary inte surface Now our experimental setup is complete we have an emiter an actor and at least one sensor The GeoView and the TreeView respectively should nw look similar to this Getting started with Lucudia FW iT m jum 4 Fire 133 The Mode wi Ugh sour Reflector and Sensor eft GeoView ight Teen 2 55 Simulate the scene Now we want to simulate the scene by the Mante Carlo ray trace algorithm in arder to get some results on how our optical system performs 4 Select Menu Simulation Simulate by Monte Cario 2 The ray trace dialog has appeared As number af rays we enter 2000 internal multiplied with 0 but keep the default values for the
243. r selected Transfers oniy selected parts of the active LacidShape model into the active CATA document info Provides information about the LucidShape to CATIA transferina separate dialog see Figure 2 1 The Catia Transfer Dialog Subdivision to transfer the curent CATIA document ta the active Luc stape model transfer Transfers the whole active CATA document into the curent LucidShape model transfer selected Transfers oniy the selected parts oftheactive CATA document into the curent LucidShape model info Provides information about the CATIA to Lucdshape transferina separate dialog see Figure 2 1 The Catia Transfer Dialog z Fileand Eat Figure 2 4 The Catia Wane Diog 2 3 2 The Rhino Transfer Dialog Choose axis system for Conver The is system which defines an entra transformation to be ap son LucidShape Rhino Rhino gt Lucidshape plied when transferring geometry between LucdShape and Rhina pi origin Shea Rio piek the mks systers oia Bs Sucht Rhino to pik the mis systers z mls 2 Btn Sheath che pde optem xad Horii eath saari wan oc tee Lise node Mui ur RE Star once ave ciope nod The coordinates are displayed in Luc shape after picking the data in Rhino Sub alog to transferthe current LucidShape model ta the active Rina document L5 Model Rhino Transfers the LucidShape sceneinto Rhino and deletes the ald existing scene within Rhino Add LS
244. r the stretching ar compression of a LID Thus each set describes a certain dynamic long the parameter w The data n each set can also be interpolated eite Dy parameter Lew ar pbetwise Ez ubtdior 104 2 Example Aer the applications set press apply and arrange the different IDs by using the Window Tle horizontal menu tem The picture fust below shows the three source LIDS the resulting LID lower lettpan and the dialog right part Again the coordinate system genial in sl LIDS To visualize the position af hem mit 1 i hi gure 18 The D Editor and tbe source LIDS the sum i the undermost picture Mow we are going to investigate the difference of2D and 30 data Move the mouse into one of the Source LIDS press the right mouse button and apen the option navigate in 3D 4D data set Be cause this is a 2D LID fle the arrow buttons are disabled Le there is no third dimension in this LiD Now move the mouse ina the resulting LD and open this option again Now the arrow buttons can be used to scroll through the data Press the play button and follow the dynamic beam pattern The w value corresponds to road curvature and different w valuas show diferent beam pattem s upeditar wa j Er Figure ag Beam Paten om the top to the bottom wea vg a nova Mow in this concrete example the third parameter w becomes the quantity Toad curvature The cur
245. r to the z axis otherwise it will be corrected to be perpendicular Allows to select a Point to be used asthe origin According toz ndx anis oniy curves can be selected They have tobe orthagon a Ao existing anis system can be selected The values or origin and catis are taken over Changes from positive to negative values and vice versa E Geomety e se 8 B8 nie zem 8 FK 3j s Meum 8 5 at ot gue 4 27 The Create Axis System dialog 4302 Create Clipping Plane Creates a virtual plane in order to clip objects in the geometry view normat spa The plane s nomal vector for the orientation in the giobal als seen origin tua The origin of the plane within the global asis system 430 Create Object Vector Createsa new empty objectvectorin the current model An object vector an he used as container to collect geometry data This is analogue taa folder or directory in a Fe explorer This command has no dalog Geometry 4 20 4 Create Polylines from Rays Captures rays from the GeoView and generates these rays as polylines in other words it creates a geometry stored in an ObjectVector These Tays then can be used and exported to CAD systems Ta delete polylines Usethe TreeView or Geametry Select All Paylines and tne delete button The rays can be deleted as usual with the delete ray button The length ofthe rays can also be controlled ma
246. rboard Increasing the number allows to see more details ofthe deviation deviation type Defines the type of deviation in the ray deviation diagram You may select between deviation in degrees with respec to thein coming parailel ray bundle ar total deviation in mmonthe viewing position plane in addition horizontal or vertical deviation may Be selected for both modes The results fr total sao and otal are identical with exception ofthe map seale of course checkerboard name The name ofthe checkerboard image ray deviation name The name ofthe ray deviation image Figure 917 Example Checkerboard undistorted e and distorted by lens igh 9 4 5 Wall Thickness Diagram For a given start surface take thesuface s nomal at a u v parameter Value and calculates ifthe corresponding normal ray Le the ray starting tthis point on the start surface with the normalas direction vector iater Sects another target surface I there is an intersection the distance or Wali thickness between the start and the target surface at uv maybe defined as the computed intersection distance This tool computes a distance diagram between two given surfaces and displays the diagram as a uv data view It should be clear that this calcu lation only makes sense in cases where such intersections exist over a substantial portion of the start surfaces uvsange Analysis of Geometry and LID Data ss pated p at Pwe uo Figure
247. re already stored in the ray fle tis strongly recommended to assign a ray fle emitter materialto a point only Q e to create a point light source What happens when assigning aray le onta a surface It creates random paints and normis on the surface a itoral it transforms the next randam rays positions and direction So the stored informations about the origin af each ray are more less strongly blurred s Light Sources E Simulation with more than one Rayfile nta there are four possibiities when using more than ane ray le in a simulation same number af rays and identical fax same number af rays dierent fux diferen number of rays same flux ferent number of rays and different Ru inthe cases two to four the fx af the ray fles more precise the flux of the single rays automat ically is adjusted This ensures both that the ray race process can make use of the whale number af rays stored in each ray fle and that the resulting Rux is the sum of the original axes saved in the ray fles The Rayfile format used in LucidShape is explained in detail in the Technical Reference section 34 This paf fle can be found either in the documentation folder of your LucidShape Installation CMoouddledhnialpdh or on our website at hitp mww brandenburg Smbh de praducts lucidshape downloads manuals Copies a ray fle into the same or anther format You may choose either Lucidhape ASCI or Lucidstape binary input roy fle nam
248. re created with a constant radius ar not Available variations are a linear ascending radius eitherinu orv ora linear interpolation Teithers ora gon Parametersto be entered are the respective staring and ending radius radio button squorefaterating Determines whether the dats are arranged in a square array Uke a chess board ar alternating e 4 3 4 3 radio button pattem pitch Determines the distance between wo dats either in horizontal orin vertical direction Similar to the settings Tor the dot size just above the respective distance maybe setto both directions ied ne direction xed both variable or weighted manual Ist of wales s reform Geometries Menu Selection 5 11 Retro Reflector A common reflector is an extended unstructured surface nthe three dl mensional space it reflects the light due to the reflective material The principle ofthe Retro Reflectorisnot based on the material afthe surface buton thespatialarrangement ofthe single surfaces uses the principle of tatal intemal reflection to reflect tne light back in the direction aF the light source To achieve this the surface structure fs ul up from small camer reflectors each one formed by a certain number af side faces de pending on the curently selected type The reflected directional beam optionally can be widened Therearethree base types available to choose among Cubic geometry build up tom three side faces twin cubic geometry and squa
249. reate a planar rectangular Surface to be used as the base surface planar circle This option wil create a planar circular surface To be used as the hase surface og show joint surfaces W de activated the yellow jaint surfaces completely wil be re maved from the model They will neither be show inthe GeoView or they wili take partin the simulation process Thi fag is available oniy in case of selected surfaces because With planar surfaces there wil be no gaps at all adlo button select normal for This choice determines the orientation ofthe single pyramids the reflection system more precisely the relative direction the tip points at rotation angles The default orientation o o i can be altered byrhese three anges When using tation angles a temporary planets crestea is normal isrotated bythe given values Each geometry is calculated to this normal o the narmal ofthe Piane becomes the global normal for ali geometries Surface normal The normals are taken directly om the points ofthe base surface ise linear planes Here the surface is approximated or re cre sted by a grid of planar rectangles This is a bit similar to the Concept oftessellation a finer graduated grid gets closer to he original surface resulting in overlaps The normals are taken rom these assistance planes please alsa see below surfaces The assistance surface is created by spitting the original base surface into the given number of planar fa
250. reated in the Tespective loading saving folder named identical to the model fie Choose the NURBS shading mode inthe GeoView between either Via OpenGL or via ressellation esselates the geometry and dis plays the shades mangles Choose the shading mode of immed surfaces in the GeoView between either via OpenGi or via ressellation These three values determine the appearing n the GeoViewand the tessellation used in simulations when using the Triangle ar Mixed Mode simulation method min edge length This is the minimal length of the triangles Side This Tower iit needed to prevent too small angles man edge length Lowering this value wil force the tesselation process to create mare triangles the recreated surface becomes Smoother max chord height Discretizatian parameter for surfaces inside the geometry smaller values lead toa finer discretization This is tne maximal allowed distance between the original surface and the triangle created here also see the sketch below his able max auxilary nodes per surface This ls the maximal number oftiangles or vertices created when perfominga teselaon tthe model This number can be Imite to reduce the system requirements but should be set to o Zero means that as much triangles orvericesas necessary are created to fulfil the surface esselaton parameters Theres a protection included 10 3 Miscellaneous Menus prevent system crashes due toanunlimited numb
251. recisely listens or aperture and the defined looka position aa acho hg Yori bcd oam reser TERRE e Ss E iret DG cen Gl coenam umi T aee mahaten Figure pos The Luminance Camere Dialog V camera type hatfangie sestop focal distance horizontal vertical FOV angle eld of view Defines the type ofthis camera to either pin hale thin tens or parallel This is the half af the cross section af the solid angle given in degree The aperture stop afthe camera has to be defined The number is the ratio of the aperture area and the focal length Itis also possible to select the actual adis oaf the stop n case of the Parallel camera model you can also define the cone acceptance athe half angle directiy Defines the focal length ofthe camera When using he thin lens oda itis directly the focal length of the lens In case of using pole the focal length is the distance between the aperture and the mage plane When using the half angle in the parallel model the focal length is not defined the image plane then s Identical to the camera plane Defines the horizontal and vertical ilo view respectively both ien in degrees E Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials Image plane width height Defines the horizontal width andthe vertical height ofthe image fiel respectively button getset Exchanges the data wth GeoView Using the GeoView as a preview Tor the camera image and then simply adopt
252. red pyramid geometry soos granty d vocero Beeren 5 cree Erie paced eism Opawie Qnis soe eesti Ea Ets prt outa emt rod riden hade 0 m p gue 5 37 The Retro Reflector Diog Each single surface automatically gets a certain colo assigned depending on the function of the surface The main surfaces are drawn in red blue or green Th jaint surfaces between the main E Fresfom Geometries Menu Selection surfaces are shownin yellow these additional surfaces ether canbe created or omitted necessary the yellow surfaces wil be connected with magenta surfaces drop down menu One can choose among the three above mentioned base types Each of them has slightly different options and or parameters to adjust the behaviour adi button select base surface To create the comer reflectors ane or more base surfaces are needed to arrange the reflectors on One can select either an already existing surface or create anew very simple planar surtace which es inthe xy plane select surface in case you already have your owm suracea choose one of the three choles in the drop down menu de pending on how the surfaces are available n the TreeView Nent mark all the respective entries nthe TeeView and press Apply Selection Please nate When using selected Ob fectVectos the surfaces have to be Inthe layer directly below the selected ObjecVectr not n a layer belam planar rectangle This option wil c
253. reeView GeoView Light Screen View UWiew Text Eat View MBBS I surface Display Properties aR Relrame Reframe Seleced a a eom in Zoom Out m Fit Uv Data Size to Window a Toate the UV data display of standard grid ines vs polar grid Tines B 3 Simulation and Script Execution Tools GPU Ray Trace Monte Carto Ray Trace Light Mapping Ray Trace CALA arae ererat Rano Rays Car Random Rays z nterapt Simulation or Sept x Execute Curent Sept File E stor Toolbar lens x cer selection B 4 Geometry View Tools 7 ogaie Black wate Toggle Shaded wireframe Toggle anges Wire ose Gia Tessie Lighdsta Wiretrame Toggle UishtdatasAutoRedram Wiretrame Tx agl et B00 View Front View Left View Right View Bottom View Top View B 5 UV Light Data View Tools anpi Mast Recently Used Test Tabie Duplicate Uv Lighrdataview Finer UV LightdataVew without or with Gradient Protection Calculate the Gradientin U arv Navigate Through UV Data Blocks Add UV Dataset Subtract UV Dataset Deviation Between UV Datasets A e scale the UV Dataset mirror the UV Dataset in U or V Direction Rotate the UV Dataset by 90 Applies te current UWiews min max values onto ali UWViews E Appendix C Mouse Interaction Reference Inthe following LAB stands or Left Mouse 8 CA Geometry View
254. reen View CA Wllightdata ew noone C Tex Edit View Jo C Message Box 3o D ffcacy Scale Factor and hina CAD n a rmm DM Me Hikirg Sole FU aao aR 3 Materials Import Export Rhino CAD ES D aaaeeeaa si Chapter 1 Getting started with LucidStudio 2 LucidStudio Overview Locdstudioistheinteraciv htertaceto the LucidShape design system Its graphical user interface follows Microsoft Windowst standard and i thus Intuitive user frendly and easy to leam and master It allows all design tasks to be performed at a mouse cick State ofthe art computer graphics Open are used forthe 3D scene views allowingan easyand fast navigation within the scene Tree views provide an overview ofthe light simulation scene and simplify the procedure of modifying objects and properties UV daa views displaylight data and other value distributions over a 2D UV parameter range Luci Studio also offers numberof analyzing tools interactive ray path analysis curvature analysis for surfaces smoothness fiters and gradient analysis of light data to name a few Being a Windows application LuciaStudio is primarily operated with a mouse but its Luc shell Interface makes it easy to extend functionality to adapt the applications to your special needs You write your own toal n the LucidShell language and run E simply by clicking from within LucidStudio This documentation has two purposes it introduces you to the use of LucidStudio and it serves a
255. rement but single angles With the radio button the user can choose whether the single angle or the complete data shall be imported Pag use this fle This lag can be usedto in or exude single les fromthe export RERED fiag select oll checked al listed fles are taken into account RERED Ej Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials 7 9 Set Colour Seis the colour af objects either all only selected or for selected object vectors 710 Set Texture Sets a texture on the currently selected surfaces The texture bitmap fle may be Display Texture from the context menu in the geometry view ater vll D META deri Freies ehem pem m B Bm iE p TES mare E Lu L3 Eres emen im m Sw om Figure 7 35 Tie Tent dig bitmap filename After an object has been selected one is able to choose a picture fin various formats and set it as a texture onto this abject ZEE tags advanced texture options This fag enables some further options and parameters Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials radio button mesh surface fx ture coordinates from radio button mulidevltes texture priority define texture n un pv direction Specifies the plane on which the texture shall be set no i kind aan automatic detection the other three possibilities setit dir E This en disabies MIP maps for diferent distances to the object ferent resolutions of one texture are used to save memory and time for computing for a great dist
256. rface along the zavis ofthe given axis system The start and length sweep is determined by the creation parameters the form by a palr of radii and the closeness o the sinuoshty by the slape ana radius Geomety radio button creation ype stant sweep angle start angle length radusinuy slope raduis 435 Extruded Surface The creation of thecal can be specie either via two anges star sweep or with a start angle plus length Determines the start and sweep angle ofthe coil Together with the slope this determines the dimension ofthe coil Determines the start angle and length of the coil Together with the slope this determines the dimension ofthe coll Determines the two radii ofthe ellipse base area in u and v Determines the ascent of the coil along the given anis Determines the radius o the coil body Creates an extruded surface The surface is created by extruding a curve along a given direction prole curve extrusion direction xyz start length end length 4 3 6 Offset Surface The curve which should be extruded The direction vector The start and end ofthe extruded surface alang the extrusion ver Creates an offset surface An fiet surfaces a surface witha gen dis tance fom a base surface The distance s measured in normal direction ofthe base surface base surface offset The surface to be offset Tre distance between the base surface and the resulting offset surface
257. rientation of the plate sensor has to be adjusted depending on the orientation af the axis system received from the CAD program The stra dialog allows to determine the pasion of tne axis system on the surface eg fitis located cantre justi in the tower lef come t Foam amer n Cun Com Cam C lomia Len Cie Len it gure 7 2 Te same geometry nith the two sensors created the dots marked in orange lf the respective surface does not contain any axis system t easily can be created via Menu Geometry Create Axis Syster Select Axis mark the surface and apply that now a new ans system Is attached to this surface possibly the orientation of it has to be adjusted Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials Aher applying the license plate dialog two sensors are created One plane senor to show the layer where the measurement will be done and one sensor with dots these dats indicate the singe measurement points marked in orange In the picture right bela Figure 7 24 Te same geometry with the two sensors created the dots marked in orange 7 5 Media for Refractive Materials Creates a medium to be used for refractive materials The medium wil appear as an object in the tee view where i can be selected and assigned to a chosen material Far spectral simulations detalled spectral distribu tions can be used otherwise LucdStudo allows you to apply the average values common in literature e g ofthe refractive inde
258. rm an assessment check pressing the Apply Bench button The result of the benchmark test can be examined in three different representations Star glyphs Bar Chart and a numeric table Furthermore tts possible to View the conesponding road Lbs and driver view The latter one opens a new dialog which allows to select special assessments which are visualized in the driver view representation ome The name ofthe benchmark to be used The only one which is Implemented so faris TCars and only fr low beam Ds ative side The assessments can be applied for bth LHD left hand driving and RHD right hand diving traffic vehicle selection Alcus to switch between the different vehicles lefHahthighiowhean Pressing the buttons opens a fle selection boxin order to select the LID files to be checked Show displays the Ds n ci stape Left and right refers to the left and right headlamp af the car It has nothing to do with left right hand traffic button pos itpressed dialog for the mounting properties pops up here the poston ofthe lamps canbe altered They are measured relatively othe center of tme car name The name ofthe current sample vehicle E of Geometry and LID Data color button set asis button oad Lbs button driver view button apply bench button sove button remove vehicle button odd vehicle button update fag with tow beam Pag with high beam Stoaprset Dave mon fusEmvod T
259. s The position af the plane inside the volume sensor is displayed below a Info poi button show pone Shows the cently selected planarsectninthevolume sensor display button odd plane Adds a planar section to the volume sensor display button show max planes Determines the three planar sections with the respective highest intensity values and shows them in the GeoView button stort animation W pressed the currently active planar section is moved forwards and bacoards in the range of the border defined below button stop animation W pressed the animationis stopped andthe last positionis kept button deor planes Removes ali planar sections from the volume sensor display Analysis of Geometry and LID Data m em ume 000 3j mwasH me FT meeenpmao ram creme 3 8 0 E chen ete _startend plane hotspot calor hotspot threshold Don Pire _ i Pana Show lias Pinea attr Ste Oar Fre Seaigee J End lane TE en ctr GE Ett T Se pt Potts Cr azo Shoe Hr E sete Figure 92 The Visualize Volume Sensor Diog Determines the border fe animation The range i not taken From the sensor range for allthree directions the range to RGB values determining the display of the hat spots inthe geo metry view The percentage he hotspot threshold Only regions having in tensity values above this threshold are defined and displayed as har spots fag show hotspots as points IE checked
260. s the range isonlyshited and not rotated fyou have a Candela sensor with LUD data and shift in order to get a new range you wil et a LID atis different rom the LO you get when you start with that new range and make aray trace For Candela distributions you should apply this funcion only with small shift values resize range Ane W208 is a and uv resolution 5 5 may be set ta the light data view Affects tha selected data on rotate Allows to rotate the w data about hex y or z axis Rotation angles are specified in degrees The rotation effect depends on the uv data type X Y or Z krop by intensity threshold Sets al data values which are below a user specified threshold toro By activating an additional check button the uvsview may alsa be cropped to the data s effective region Le the bounding Tectangle of the set of non zero data cells arrange range The new ucange delta The new wv delta Le the new entry size curent zoom Button that works like a reset the original values are used Mirror an Symmetry mivorinu Minors the data in u direction minorinv Minors the data in v diection swap uandy Swaps the u horizontal and v vertical anis symmetry nu Makes the data symmetric in direction symmenyinv Makes the data symmetri in v direction symmetry in uand v Makes the data symmetric both in u and v direction extenttype Cto p g60 Estents UDs oftype C to a horizontal range of 360 Symmetry al
261. s Bird s ye View pulldown menu ilumination Determines the type ofthe ilumination used forthe calculation pe please also refer ta the chapter 3 3 in LucidTechnical pdf Types flluminance n LucidShape button set mounting exis Opens a smali separate dialog which allows to define the mounting coordinate system position orientation etc Thetwo Buttons default street igh and default automotive dieclyse the values to the respective standard values length in max Afm The min max range of the street and the resoltionin u af the resulting UID on the steetin m width min mas a m The min max width af the street and the resolution in v ofthe resulting LID on the street nim 1033 Editing LIDs in this dialog part the previously loaded LDscan be customised the can be stretched shifted ro tated scaled and mirrored With the settings shown n the picture right below ve different UDS have been loaded Refla Ref These ive IDs are used to create eight single LID parts the resulting UD is the sum aF these LID parts ES Tal pwp o OE RB OE rr 2 fra Tr r wus fe Jf OR B B E hr Wwe fs xh mnn b p B hh r ufa ROT EORR CB CR ff wee XR 8 FR _P_ 6 E mur IRR ORB CB CR CORR muss SCR BB a iure os The UD itor Eds A WX RENI a m ubtdior og onott M checked the respective UD is used Le tis taken into account For calculation the resulting LID if unchecked not pullsownmenu use ID Select here the UDs to be use
262. s Convers eitherthe selected or all curves inthe geometry view to NURS curves to Polyines Discretises either the selected orallcuvesin the geometry view tw polylines to B zier ares Converts eitherthe selected or all curves inthe geometry view to B zierares 4 15 Modify Data Structures of Geometric Objects The tools under Geometry Modify allow to modiy internal data structures of curve o surface objects The use of the tools in this section requires some basic knowledge abou NURBS curve and surface mathem aies AF Geometry extract Surfaces Extracts the surfaces roma selected SuraceShapeora MultiSur faceshape nti Surfaces Replaces trimmed surfacesinshapes or trimmed surfaces by their hase surfaces Le removes the wim bounds elevate degree of NURBS curve Elevates the polynomial degre ofthe selected NURBS curve by the entered value without changing the curve s geometry levate degree of NURBS surface Elevates the polynomial degrees in u and v ofthe selected NURBS surface by the entered values without changing the surface s geometry reduce degree of URBS curve Reduces the polynomial degree of the selected NURBS cuve by the entered value without changing the cuve s geometry reduce degree of NURBS surface Reduces the polynomial degrees inuandof he selected NURBS surface by the entered values without changing the surface s eomer modifyknotVertorin MURAS Modifies the number of knots ta the curve s parameterizat
263. s and sets respectively To apply tne change of these parameters press Update in the first part ofthe dialog the aiming or mounting position of a headlamp can be specified this specifies the position on the car motorecle where are lamps are attached As default there are two entries one for the left beam and one for the rignt beam Eg to enable the above mentioned combine LID fle increase the number of aimings to three and pres Update Next name this new aiming and specify the mounting positions ofi that would be ec y with z depending on he vehicle Now it can be chosen among the other amings in the dialog part headlamp beam patter below aerar RO a L i 0 RB PER BOR Figure 12 1 The Aiming Dig Part a7 Applications position rotation The name ofthe aim selection as shown in the tamps dialog ox below The default names are left ight and enter The x yrz coordinates ofthe lamps The tt angle Gn degree af the lamps in vertical direction a positive value points upwards The rotation angle n degree ofthe lamps in horizontal direction a positive value points to the left The roll angie n degree e g the inclinatian afthe lamps due to the inclination of a motor cycle in curves Inthe next part ofthe dialog the single lamps with their beam pattem are isted One can add remove and modify these patter he number of entries is controlled via the value lamps at the very bottom ofthe complete d
264. s may be created as an rotational ens an extruded lens an extruded symmetrical lens a Torational and extruded lens a torus lens or as a torus symmetric lens With dierent parameter ta be entered with diferent parameter to be entered lens type One can create one ofthe following lenses rotational extruded extruded symmetrie rotational extruded torus and torus symmet D base ine cue For the creation of the lens a predefined base ine may be used or athernise an extemal curve be selected In case of base line the inner outer heights used inner outer diameter The wo radii ofthe lens Normally the inner radius iso inner outer height Thetwo heights ofthe ft side Normally both sides have the same height and the fat side becomes a disk stort angle sweep angle The start and sweep angle for the rotational surface The lens is created from start to start sweep Also used ortorusand onus symmetrical lend stant end width The start and end width of the extruded lens The lens is created from start to start end stant end length The tart and end length ofthe extruded lens Thelensis created from start to start end win The extension af the extruded symmetric lens in x direction start endring height he start and the end z position of the torus lens inner outer ring radius The jmerandthe outer ring adius ofthe torus and tarus symmet rie lens focal radius The focal radius af the torus and symmetric torus
265. s restored so ali changes are discarded ike e g tering Re frames the value range to the default range after zoom etc Reames the value range to the default range after zoom et Sets the size ofthe view frame to the ratio ofthe value rectangle minimizes the size of the view ame while stili showing all of the data Duplicates the view currently selected in focus Toggles the display type of LID data between standard the default or poiar Palar views are especially sutableor2 ype Lb data Shows units and anis annotation text for candela Shows units and axis annotation text for lux ona R 25m sphere Shows units and axis annotation text for lux on a R 10m sphere 342 Color Scaling and Scene Lines it same max nia liearfog scale false groyfalse color only 180 Lines isotropic vem sounes ANUV data objects ofall datavews get the same UV value range The range ts taken from the current setting n the data view in fons Toggles between a linear and a logarithmic color mapping Toggles between a gray or false color value display Taggies between the display types of iso lines ona Toggles the isaopi view on aff In an isotropic view the ratio ofthe display rectangle is the same as the value rectangle Toggles iso lines on off E Views color bar orid scene lines iter basie smoothing advanced smoothing Toggles the display of the color ba Toggles the display of the grid Selects
266. s the disibuon s gradient calculated according to the FMVSS 108 regulation Converts the angular coordinate system afa given ight data dis tribution to the type x pole Converts the angular coordinate system ofa given light data dis ribution to the A type y pole Converts the angular coordinate system afa given ight data dis tribution tothe type ple ume o vens TORT en iwa r Cuert Zn E eo Figure yt UV Data convert to Pole Diog The new UV ange of the chosen pole type The new Vela Le the new entry size Adjusts the values to the current zoom of the LID data to be con verted Starting fom a new source position the ight distribution s projected onto a new lane with the sven sprang EI Views suus osaten altri terre oian ee E Do E orewa F T sueeos E T sme meme B FT piver E Hrer E BE pioenore 00 ems swt Fema het 5 lel nd indt UA Figure 3 12 UV Data project ta Plane Dialog source position The new position othe ight source source optical axis The direction ofthe z axis source base direction The direction ofthe xax plone range The vrange of the light distribution plone yronge The v tange ofthe light distribution plone XY delta The size ofeach entry in uand v meter factor The meter factor is used to calculate the illumination inl s menja mumination ype Alcws the user to select between six ferent types of lumina tion types such
267. s way by just wo Surfaces of refractive ype as longas they cover the complete Tay paths in your system This dialog part s described n detall In Section 7 5 Media far Refractive Materials Pag total absorption for TR It checked the ight usually elected due to the TIR effect willbe design is active absorbed instead absorption coefficient The absorption coefficient u this is not a percentaged value but refractive determines the exponential decay of intensity in an absorbing medium due to the Beer Lambert a gaussian type reflective Using the GaussReflective option will produce a usual gaussian distribution while the use of the peak reflector results in a very Sharp gaussian peak Bath variants are also avallabie septic choices fora more detailed description f the ference in the Formulas used please referto the LucidTechncl pdf chapter 2 4 fag local race n mult surface When performing a Monte Cario simulation using the NURBS shapeefactiv method the raytracer cnecksali surfaces whether they are hit by the next intersection When a ray has entered a medium eit Intersects with a MultiSurface Shape and the Rag s checked the raytrace onty tests surfaces rom this Multisurface Shape forthe next intersection So the ag can help saving some caleulation time ado button exitsensors The ag exit fow sensor adds an additional ow sensor material efective refractive to the geometry the Nag exit my sensor adds a ray le sen
268. s with both spectral and high dy namic range HDR informations For this modification t takes the special perceiving af the human je into account The goal is to achieve an altered image which looks Uke the human eye would See the unaltered picture To access this dialog first mark a spectral LID Now open the dialog ether via Menu UWiew Spectral Calculations Human Eye Vision image or open the context menu by right clicking nta the LID and choose the HEV entry Pressing Apply creates an extra LID naw using the siders WiL affect this extra LID only ambient brightness Adjusts the image for diferent viewing conditions Le conditions how the tone mapped image s presented The human eyes are Automatically adjusting to diferent levels of rightness this sider ters the image to achieve the same perceiving unde diferent tonditions 1 normal conditions like e a usual luminated office o Viewing the image in a partly darkened room e g with a beamer ar monitor contrast The fine tuning for the image s contrast os lower contrast higher contrast chromatic adaption Allows ta influence the level af the local chromatic adaption for hetone mapped image ea local shift of the white poi lowerdpper cutoff Remaves some outlier pel from tone mapped image effectively aee wih alow high intensity are ignored for sealing the ighines af the output image This leads toa beter contrast of the displayed image It works as foll
269. sa reference handbook in your dally work Mtis assumed that you know about optics and lighting and its terminology Unique definitions of he terminology used in this handbook are given in the glossary t Is also assumed that you are acquainted with the standard Microsoft Windows dialogs like Open File If tnis does not fit you Wwerecommend you to irst read the help texts accompanying e g the standard Microsoft Windows Wordoad Editor To start please take a look at the next section of this chapter on the principles of LuclaStudio It wats impatant aspects ofthe GUI operational concepts of LucidStudiorand the special terminology hatis used throughout tnis manual After that you can follow the example given inthe last section ofthis chapter t was created fora quick start and guides you through the common steps of creati an optical setup in LuciaStudio Once you are familiar with the basic steps you can modulaly in reas the repete of commands you apply Therefore the following chapters deseribeali menu items of LociStudio step by step The commands available to you within each menu are explained and their application dialogs are addressed in etal 12 Principles of LucidStudio This chapter will guide you through the basic operational concepts of Lucdstudo and give some Insight in what the important structures of its Gare wil tell you about the concepts experi ment description Le how light sources or sensors are defined You also
270. script fle enabling you to extent the menu interface by programming in LuciShell language and setup the interface far your current project or example fra project with several calculation procedure far each reflector surface You can make menu items far each refector part and enter your election angles into your hame made dialog box 3 Fleand Eat menu operations Parent menu entry for the commands described subsequently load default menu Thisentyloadsth fle with the menu structure whichis internally predefined and hard linked to the executable fle This menu Eannot be changed replace menu The default menu can be replaced byan own written menu Once selected the le name is stored inthe INI fle odd menu Opens a fle dialog to select a menu do fle inorder to add a customized menu to LucidStudio 2 6 Printing The following menu entries are available under File printer Parent menu entry for the commands described subsequentiy IE print preview Preview what would appear on the printer print Sends the document ar pars of it to the printer print setup Setup printing parameters like page size and format print page setup Set parameters for the printed page layout ke title text or scale factor for the geometry view ELI rd Mem rine Heime ue Ee E Cue Some E m B LE ex Figure 2 3 The Print Setup and Pint Page Sep Dialogs 3 Fileand Eat 27 Standard Editing The
271. signs the peculiarities of tne complicated geometries of real lluminations to Lucidstudo s easy To handle emitter materials and certain special ight sources m Efficacy Seale Factor and Rhino CAD Im Expart D 2 Materials Import Export Rhino CAD When using extension jdm e g with the Save As command the current geometry is saved in he Rhino CAD Format Ifthe fe contains material shapes the corresponding material names are lso stored and are available in Rhino Iis also possible t set material names directly n Rhino to prepare far impart of hino data in LucidShape When now using the exact material names defined In uceibranLucidsWatetalibrang lg the respective Shapes are created using this spe cfi Material when loading a fle nto LucidStudio Te Following material names are predefined and shouid be used bath in Rhino and in LucidShape in order t use this import export feature correctly both ways Absorber Absorber Emiter Lambert Emitter Directional Emitter Reflective ideal Specular Miror Lambertian Reflective Gaussian Reflective Gaussian Retro Reflex Reflective ABs Reflective Refractive PC Material PMMA Material Glass Material Lens APEC Material LEXAN Material Sensor Lux Sensor E Index A Mors i Poproiimated Interpolated Curve Explicit Curve 207 Fiting Curve 106 Read Value Row 107 Approximate Interpolated Surface Create Belt Surace 16 Create Fitting Surface 115 Create
272. single paint s considered valid geometry Geometries can also be exchange data om and to extemal CAD software Please note tat pure geometry without further properties wil be considered as a passive element and therefore is nat a shape The Material is the second property afa shape Whether you define aight source or a lens or example any valid shape must also consist ofa material For convenience the material properties available within LucidStudio are split up into the three classes af emitters actors and sensors Sensors are to some extend an exception to the other elements within LucidStudio They are not oniy a material property but can be stand alone entities themselves in that case they stil possess a geometry but it wil be of infinity type e g an infinitely distant or infinitely large detection area This is usually pre defined for such a sensar type In consequence not all available sensors of LociStudio can be attached to fite geometries The Views of Luc studio are separate windows that show diferent parts or aspects af youre periment Thus they serve different purposes for design or analysis of your optics setup Views an be considered the main user Interfaces of LucidStudio and are dealt with in Section 122 Sems Almost every objectin Lucidshapehas four Attributes ar Nags Editable E Visible V Pickable P and Traceable T An exemplary TreeView is shown in the picture below see Figure t The Mod
273. sor to the model both wl collect all rays that hit the geometry Material Combination With this type of material the user is able to create an own material combination with the wanted properties inthe wanted ratio availabe for both reflective and refractive the values can be set Independently re e Scie w ER xj e Greene caecus I ot ae Uemamtteave sme I en eee n a e ame Figure 7 9 The Materia Combination Dolog oh relertive and refractive E Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials button edt itpresseda small dialog for this material pops up this is to edit he respective entry in the combination ist button delete pressed the respective line inthe combination dlalog s deleted button update pressed the sum ofthe entered values is updated button odd pressed an addtional entry may be chosen and added to the combination list This way it s even possible ta create a material With bath reflective and refractive behaviour e g a emtrane Parent plane Volume Scattering Inad iontothe behaviour of single surfaces avolumescattering can be specified The user either canimponta self designed model ar choose among three physical models and adust the parameters To ft the customer specifie materiais Basically the Henyey Greenstein Model is the same as the Isoradiant Model oniy enhanced by an additional parameter vanoa Crowan C rid Haney Geerdsh C e T tll 7 bron seo ant
274. start and thus the orientation and the end af the tarus EU ET e ge 6 Details of the U Shape Light Source Dialog profile radius The radius ofthe cross section ellipse xy radii The two ellipse radi stant sweep angle The start and sweep angle define the orientation and a sub arc ofthe elipse 6 2 5 Coll Shape Light Source This function creates col shaped ight source by using a helix as a base curve This type can be used fo create the laments of special lamp models een E dott oro pataan ane Come CO Fue Details ofthe Cul Shape Light Source Dialog Light Sources sto length sweep angle rads uv slope radius 6 s Rayfile Light Source Creates a ight source rom a ray The start angle defines the orientation ofthe helix The length of it can be determined directly via the length ar indirectly via the sweep angle Le the number of windings rhis operates In com bination with the slop The two radi ofthe base helix curve fu x the coll has the orm ota circle The slope determines the ascending angle af the helix a higher value increases the height of the resulting coil but not the eng The radius determines the inner radius Le the diameter of hecirde when looking rom above onta the coil y fle When simulating this light source Ende SE m Aray fle can be achieved by recording the light emitted rom a exact model of alight source Afer that the ray le can
275. suring 9 11 Apply Test Tables Algo testo ond lien et ales ri Intent Distributions UD in UV Data views Ds can be checked with va eatem automate plar eame ES means right handed system LES means left handed system p To apply the selected test table make sure to have the wanted UWView tobe checked in focus On request we can extend the test tables far your special needs we also can add additional tables whicharena yet included Due to the reoccurring changes in legal regulations however you should heck that the test table you need is up to date with tne requirements for your country You are always welcome for any comments on state of the art legal regulations For adaltional informations about the customization of the test tables and a description f the Single measurement tasks please have a laok at the new whitepaper LID Test Table paf which can be found at http ww brandenburg gmbh dejproducs lcidshape downloade whitepapers and in Section 122 3 Editing of ID Test Tables Please note that the values in the output window are rounded so even ifa measured value seems to be identical to a legal it it may be displayed in blue or red aem mme REC Figure 9 The D Measure Diog E Analysis of Geometry and LID Data generairegulationarea Select here the general regulation area ike eg ECE USA IS etc The second list and ts entries are created automatically due 7 othe selection done here pedfcr
276. symmetrically with regard to theae as the y axis or with regard to both of them The reflector calculation starts on ane singe point Determines the calculation direction used for the electors calculation The is either in x n z direction or via angle The direction can be changed to avoid some mathematical problems Tke the handing of poles at the origin af the reflector when using the usual entent ina The eflectors vertex position on the zaxis Determines the size ofthe rectangular reflector in xy direction Similar to the feature available for prism band an optional radius tan be added anto the tip and or groove of the PSCurves This Wil round the formerly more or less sharp edge of the resulting Shape The values can be set independently ta each ather Pressing the button allows ta select a material from the library Defines the reflectance the value has to be in the interval o1 Defines the polynomial degree of the two base curves Defines the number af ares for ane facet in each direction The name ofthe created elector surface The display colar ofthe reflector From Geometries Menu Selection Pag spl surface he reflector surface is split into its facets When performing a simulation using the Light Mapping method ti possible to ob Serve the simulation result foreach single facet This way their Tespective contribution tothe whale UD can be examined Choose Navigate in 3D 4D dataset In the
277. t Functions t becomes harder to keep the overview which emitter and sensor belang to which design feature So far every simulation afa difer ent light function one has to Browse the DesignFeatur falder in the TreeView and manually set toggle all the traceable Rags The main intention ofthe switch board isto group certain design features imo a set This set now ean be controlled with only a few mouse clcke within the dialag controling means to set the fags T and or V The dialog right below shows an eremplary setting with a total of three sts There are one PCS and one MF set both containing the main feature an emitter and a sensor The third set is justto Show all features at the same time E Freeform Geometries Menu Selection Sen O ted th sont B MR Rm vn wee E E E Weer woe Bierce wm EXE mw l c ow Ea Ga sree C E m ik Ga suse 7 oUm Figure saos Site Bord for Design Feature button Addallselected Markan entry in the DesignFeature folder in the TreeView and button Create set button Clear ali button Apply number of sets button update what to set button Eat button Out Pag Active Sets press this button to add this feature to the switch board eral wanted features have been addediinto list and all settings have been done press this button to create the sets Le to de termine which features shall be active at tne same ime grouped Wf pressed all features listed in the
278. t we have been used until now The other available types are elliptical Poly Carve System types PCS extrusion symmetric extrusion PCS Tectangle symmetrie and rectangle PCS In case of an eliptical collimator there are two main curves to be defined Thus are distinguished between u and v direction he parameters In case of NWSE curve specification the parameters are managed foreach curve individually gt Poly Curve Systems Far futher information please regard the separate manual for PCS here the basics ot this concept are handled and t contains much more details and explanations about the available options and parameters with their influence in the light deflection reform Geometries Menu Selection dd Figure sos Some diferent extruded Center ntis figure one can see different center geometries fom the left to the right Round symmetric extrusion symmetrie extrusion round WNES curves The control of the length aF the extrusion part iS identical in the geameties 2 3 the only ference are the two tail pieces e b Fire Some dierent ertraded Center This figure shows different center geometries created with PCS from the left to the right WNES curves WNE curves NES curves Each given curve controls one base curve the angular distance between two neighbouring curves s fixed at go the part between them is smoothly interpolated according to tne given values Thereby If there are any three Base curves defined
279. take a loak into the Macrafocal Application Manual for reference Specly the 2D gap size Fires MF refector ler dilog Set Spread To spacliy the spread angles from the facets the appropriate dialog gives access to the values for each facet ali facets at o glance qual parameters on horizont jer facets in block fece parameters target ype Macrfocal edge ay use sutoffongle Chek this box to see the reduced representation of the spread angle dialog showing only the spread values far quick actas Ifyou do not ned individual spread angles check this box to apply the same spread to all facets af one block Horizontal and vertical spread angles are defined in degree of angie deg Selects the axis system e g Y pole Chose max min or center as the locaton af the cutoff tng ine Specie direction e g top bottom or centen Define a fix slope of the cutoff line in the beam patter Fresform Geometries Menu Selection Om One eer rer te Figure ME reflector lens dialog Set facet stort The Set F start button gives access to a dialog window to tune the calculation of the facets star reference 2 steps al facets to lance equal parameters on horizont sivertical facets in block Zdeltastepsfornext faceti UV reference position in along facer edge UV encuotion star pont iL Check this box to see the reduced representation o the dialog For quick access This alters th
280. tape and Rhino simultaneously a Rhino session is started f not running ye Nate that tne correct Rhino version 2 3 ar a has to beset under Options gt Global Settings ee Section 12 23 Global Settings E Fleand Eat 234 The CATIA Transfer Dialog axis vectors The ais system which defines an extra transformation to be ap plied when transfering geometry between LucidShape and Canan reste axis in LucidShape model Creates the transformation anis system as an object ia the active pick anis fom active CATPar Custom iced Anis update asis ist creat all axis systems transfer fle format Lucdshape cana cana gt Lucidshape Luc stape model Switches to the CATIA object selection mode which allows the Selection of an auis system in CATIA Once selected the ds sys em wil be displayed in tne above axis system dialog Dropdown dialog containing aist afselectable axis systemsthat are in te curently active CATIA document Once selected the Bais system is displayed in the dialog s anis system view Getsan updated anis syster list from CATIA see Custom Picked xs Takes alas systems within CATIA and creates new copies within Luc shage Allows the user to select between IGES and STEP fe formats for the transfer between CATIA and LuciShape Sub dialog to transferthe current LucidShape model tothe active CATIA document transfer Transtersthe whole active LucidShapemodelintothe active CATIA document transfe
281. terials actors sensors spectral simulation analysis ofthe results mathematical approaches and three main FunGeo concepts MF PCS PS A short additional handbook which deseribes the concept and tse of MF in detall A short additional handbook which describes the concept and use of PS in detail A short additional handbook which describes the concept and use af PCS in detall An introduction to the LucidShape shell programming language A description ofl the data types classes and methods which are available in LucidShape manual which describes several technical and optical back grounds used in Lucidshape such as e g different sensor ypes CIL em etc spectral simulation diference between Step and ft function and mare tutorial about the LucidShape dialog programming 3 Appendix A LucidShape File Types FileFormat pescriptions iue Experiment es a tree view displays tne structure a 30 view splays te geometry and Uv Bata views display alight diat tons m Sot ftes ta be loaded into LcidShape sch as modes or also alg but not the complete experiments ee ug Dus Geometry Tes a 3D view displays the geomet ue configuration leor the cast Applications r Benchmark le forthe Licauco Benchmark test ur Festur ase for he actu Application and geomery res Sid ie tiun UV Data view displays edu fas Scip es and taska es tex view di
282. text window ito be intended to consist e g ofashort description or documentation when saving row of models Wladel Mote With different development states to showa list of used options and Parameters etc p Atter being created the design feature is listed in the TreeView here it an be deleted or the Edit Dialog can be opened Due to the internal programming af this feature no quotation marks are allowed 534 Model Documentation T r aus mete dien Ra Maenaka meson Arena enetan te Wadd Sige ccs the presentation shat conn endure ecw afe Uvbue testae additonal desipton etc awallas the Docamendaion prse I8 Due to the internal programming af this feature no quotation maris are alowed Please note This design feature so far only works with the Microsoft software in the versions 2003 2007 and ono Using the 2003 version the user has to start the software manually before creating the documentation In ter versions this initialisation is done automatically Basicallythe dialog consists of two parts In the left part the single pages appear analogue to the transparencies in PowerPoint The arrows contral tne order of the marked page n the resulting presentation The plus icon creates a new page minus deletes the marked one The flag determines Whether the single pages shall appear in tne presentation or not hs can be used e g for a shart Update inot all pages are necessary 19 Fresform Geometries Menu
283. tforward ut nevertheless computationally comply Rays are computed randomly lom the emitters ight sources they possibly terat with the actors reflectors ar lenses to finally reach the sensors detectors where they are accounted This type of simulations accurate and fleuble because tan handle al kinds of optical setups possibly Containing hundreds or thousands of reflectors and erator in LucidShape Monte Cario ray trace is implemented in various favors You may directly start a Simulation far your modelin focus or you can relacate the simulation to a number of external par allel processes You can evenhandieali the computations in a spooler that is capable of distributing Computational loads ta individual computers in your lacal network There area few common messages which are shown nthe MessageView aher the simulation process has finished They gve some information about the behaviour of the rays and what happened o them e g they have been stopped because ofa too ow Intensity reached the maximal recursion level or similar Please refer to the section called Message View number afroys zooo button set max loops Pag spectral simulation Determines the number ofrays to be used for the simulation e g s results in s000 rays The default value is 100 whichis a reasonable number far obtaining a very st sketch ofthe real Simulation result Depending an the complerty of your model and the resolut
284. th cases far each zone Pag wave I checked the profiles are created alternately up and down otherwise they alt are formed convex towards th inner of the reflector This lg can be set independent for the horizontal and vertical profile target lows toselec among near field far field and virtual This choice determines the meaning af the values entered for spread post tionfangle a selectat Both the wave Nag and the target can be set for all proles at zones The number ofzones tobe created this does not change the size ofthe reflector button update After every change ofthe number of zones this button has to be pressed to update the dialog near fieldirtual source distance The distance ofthe near feld plane or the virtual source respect ey When using ar feld ths parameter is ignored focal position HV Defines the focal positions for both horizontal and vertical us Fresform Geometries Menu Selection sicud bas cova ohn S saei C eieibum C See OMe C Sek Der ex 02 Cm P Eo E Fave ont gee trai Fr e e p ERES a E NL gue 5 20 PS Reflector Dialog Pr with Base Curve Parometers odio button reflector symmetry Determines types of symmetry the base values shall have hose curve start on pont radio button extent in minax x minimax y fog radius on tip and groove button set material reflectance degree ofars color Whether no symmetry at all
285. the display one ofthe too bar 4 A buttons The near scale better exhibits the regions where the ilumintion obtains its extreme values while the logarithmic scale better corresponds to he physiological effect e how the light is sensed Getting started with Lucltudia The complete setup ofthis be found in the first ot our tut together with some addtional formations and pictures can Menu Help Tutorial First Steps Chapter 2 File and Edit This chapter describes all commands in Lucidshape that are available under the menus Fe and LE Menu entries are referenced in the form Mena a Menu Item gt Net Menu ltem i 2 1 Editing LucidShape Documents The following menu entries are available under File open open again dose open fle for text edit show intext edt oad odd recent Creates anew empty document Choose the appropriate file ype from the menu that appears By this the view to be opened is defined Opens a fle and displays ts contents according to the fle name suffix The fle to be opened can be selected in a e selection box fora list af default LucidShape fles see Aopendi A LucidShape Fe Types Reloads the document in focus from its associated fle and up dates all ofthe document s apen views Closes the document in focus and closes all ofthe document s open views Opens a fle and displays its contents in a text edit vien Displays an already open file in a t
286. the hotspots are not shown as cubes but points button clear hotspots button show hotspots button set button insert into model Removes the display of hotspots Displays the hatspot locations Le locatians with intensities above the hotspot threshold value pressed the dialog with its current values and parameters is applied Adds this analyse into the madel so the dialog can be opened again from he TreeView E Analysis of Geometry and LID Data Figure p 13 nape The volume sensor including s ve max planes plas hot spots 343 Restore Rays from Ray History Sensor This dialog revives rays from a previously ld ray history sensor The user may speciy region in the UVData View in facus as a result all or Some rays that reached that region during a previously performed Monte Carla simulation wil be dlsplayed in the geometry view See Section 74 Ray History Sensor for a description aF how to create and handle ray History sensors a Analysis of Geometry and LID Data EdtyasehtDaa Van Edt y owe n haa eRe s Temi Madly mew R8 B m uus eee ESTEE erst sone TT ion LOWE ER iuret The Restare Rays or Ray History Sensor Dialog range selector Specify here the type of uv data range far the ray reconstruction According to the selection range parameters may be entered Available range types are at uv A single ve poit on
287. the road of the lanes ls calculated via the quotient of minimum and maximum within each lane Shown value is the minimam of either lane css Average values of the luminance L averaged over al test points vithina lane sometimes also denoted as L or simply witha Macron above the L After using the cass unction the displayed ale is the minimum from all anes The threshold increment is a measure ofthe negative effect on human perception caused by the ow ange Luminance af street lights that are rectly above or not clase by the observer Lights along heroad are summarized unti their eet reaches a satur ation af 3 increment or less The surrounding rato is the quotient af the average luminance ontwo outer zones ofthe raad and the average luminance on the adjacent pedestrian ways street L R surrounding L R Alfourtes stipes are af the same width e the lane width but 5m max The applied test stripes are again equipped with the est paint matrix 3x309 just ike the individual lanes and the komplete road are being measured asr Also the impact ofthe maintenance factor MF is shown in the second in of displayed data a53 Applications 11 2 4 Reverse Street Light Pattern Calculation The reverse calculation method af the street lighting application allows you to determine a perfect lighting solution for the specified road scene I makes use of the pint source assumption which iels Tairly well due
288. the tolerance intervals zero and the percentage deviation works as before The entered values are the absolute deviation ofthe respective legal limits tis is almost identical to the calculation of the per tentage deviation A value of 110 for the threshold minimum means thatthe green interval starts at oof he legal minimum A value of 8s for the threshold maximum means that the green interval ends at 85 ofthe legal maximum The three colours work as follows E Hoa of Geometry and LID Data The measured values which lie outside the interval ofthe egal values e below the legal minimum or above the legal maxim um are displayed in red because this measurement does not full the regulation at all The values in nina or ans Rag full he regulation but the measured value fo close o he legal limit they are displayed in yellow Tne values in pin maie he regulation and they lie within the user defined ange of tolerance they are displayed in green The colourofthe ors single measurement isused forthe colour atthe summary oo Figure 93 The UD Measure Dialog 0 oad Projection radio button lomp type og duai source source position pole geometry Uboata rondbtreet sise Pag show sad UD umhaton ype sensortype One can choose either auto headlamp or streetlight This option determines whether there are one ar two sources ets the position of the light source in carteslan coordinates Determin
289. the values from i Into the dlalog is a rather easy way to adjust the parameters unkfodor Ameterfacor whieh scales the model units e g the value ol 2 001 scales to milimeters Imm Fora more detailed treatment ofthe background of he Luminance Camera especially the different camera types please consult the Technical Manual 74 9 License Plate Sensor The License Piate Sensor isa sensor designed for the special requirements ata license plate This sensor otfers tne possiblity to check tne ilumina MD fion demanded far several specife regulations Regarding the license plate sensor there are some subtleties worth mentioning The unit the sensor shape does measure is cdm Although thisis the same unit as fora lumin ance sensor its behaviour is complete different When the rays are intersecting with the shape the license plate sensor it behaves like a perfect diffuse surface ambertan efector this s to emulate the particular surface afa icense plate These scattered rays now are counted into the sensor Creating a license plate sensar leads to the creation of two shapes One shape is the sual Sensor i isused just for showing the LID on the shape but not for the rating The other shape isthe dot sensor this one ls used for the rating with the test table This dot sensar has as many celi as dots are shown in the GeaView this number should match the respective regulation This alsa leads to the rather gross resolution in the
290. ther the figures shownin color arasa wireirame Figure ss Exmple of a surface from an CE bow be LID E joa sof Geometry and LID Data 9 3 2 Section Curve through LID Data Ataol to compute a horizontal ar vertical section curve from the UWiewe Infocus The cuve s created na special geometry view asa NURBS curve which may be used elsewhere in LucidStudio AL Qus iens Sn ttm ett Uh Topo T mar Figure p 105 The Cate Section Curve fom UD log button apply button set ali UDs button deor button save fle button create Geo button insert into model pressed themade changes are adapted and the section curves are redrawn The altered curve is not simply added to the drawing area but replaced Mark a LID and press this button to quicky change the used LID far ali section curves in the Ist itpressed the drawing areais cleared pressed the data in the drawing area is saved Into a text fle itpressed the section cures are displayed ina GeoViewthe same way as the old dialog did press the dialog with all its settings is inserted into the madel as a design feature radio button coordinate system Determines whether the curve shall be created in cartesian orin radio button curve section polar coordinates Here all section curves are listed A single section curve can be added via pressing while wl delete the currently marked Be With se the ttal number af cures can be set Here t
291. tion 5 rc eeu 3 The menu entries for FunGeo pc neers aan 52 ME Relctor tens Surface E 3 Switch Board cnn snis E Sa PCS eflectorans Surface B uu e 55 PCS Lens xa 56 Procedural Surface PS Reflector 55 3 5 7 Procedural Surface PS Refactor ee eee SA Colimator LED ane P Prismband for Ligntgides 59 Primband for Lightqides I M Luc studi Users Guide 520 Dotmask for Barkgkng n M ss Retro Reflector Ej S Genei Algorithm Optimiser eee TIU SIS Medi e R 34 Model Documentation Ej 6 Light Sources E a Base Options and Parameter T A 52 Classic Ught Sources e 62 4 Cylinder Light Source 166 3 Dis Lith Sai or re rre etes li 523 Pane Light Source 4 624 U Shape Light Source F4 as Coll Shape igh Sous e A 26 lle Lh taaa M 627 Point Light Source 4 poeti edeple oaea 4344 Volume igh Source rers f 32 LED Point ght Source an 523 Low Beam High Beam Signal Lamp and special ight Sources ccs 172 SS UB Sb ae te 65 Ray Trace Bundles EA 03 SM An BUM reete rettet Rte ieieee I 52 Grinder Flament Bundle ee T WR 5553 Free Surface Flament Bund us 65 4 Cone Bundle 6 prap SHY bemiet ge 55 6 Pont Set Bundle 7 45 7 Parallel On Normal Bundle LA 5 Tin Cone On Normal Bundle e TIT 555 RayFile Bundle me 66 Rayile and Ray Toole us aa The use of a RayFle ooann BAHUMPALANMN HERE ARIDI Ts 62 Simulation wh more than one aye de 6 83 Copy Raye 80 S04 ire con ndnieiqpa nM HMM IM MEMMMMAT ae S65 Merg
292. to avoid accidental averting ofa fe fiag implicit open alidesign checked all available design feature dialags in the model are feature dialogs opened when loading i Pag implicit execute apply on If checked an apply is enecuted on every design feature atter the all design features model has been loaded 12 2 2 Working Directory for Open Save Allows the setting afa default working director Set Working directory for Open Save opens a le selection dialog toset the working directory Use Working Directory enables or disables a fag that will make all open and save fle dialogs start rom the working directory 3 Miscellaneous Menus 1223 Editing of LID Test Tables alt UD Test Table tcan be used ag to alter the provided test tables to include an own library af regulations or to merge different est tales es from different countries it Thee dialog inthis subsection s accessible via Mena Options gt in LucdShape the LID Test Tables are implemented very flexible Provided tables easily can be altere or deleted and new ones can be created To ensure this ell ali test tables consist ot multiple single measurement tasks The function athe single measurement tasks the possible customizations adding atoider editing or deleting already existing test tables and creating new ones are explained in detail in the new Separate whitepaper UDTestTablepaf located at Mis www brandenburg
293. to the rather high distance between tht saure and road and the comparably Smali size ofthe tamp itself Besides the road parameters you have ta choose a value ofthe homo geneous illuminance 4 From the calculation you obtain the candela distribution or the chosen Romogeneous luminance an the raad surface side range times street width so the required mina f s calculated denen we E inre 8 Panel tes it TF Peon Panel staat IS Tunis E fremstan s nde C piepet Ype sone C Zp et Figure sco Reverse Street Light Pate Coleulation Diog Most of the options and parameters are identical to those described in the previous subsection so anly the differences will be explained The length specifications are either in en or normalized to rhe respective longitudinal side range Pag import street pattem W checked a self rated fle can be imported this choice re places two parameters from the dialog light ronge longitudinal Determines the long extent the light shalt illuminate in m This is quasi the distance between two lamp poles portion af lon ffr Defines therelative length ofazone ofdeciasingalilaminance stating at the border towards the centre of the uminated Foadway normalized to side range From the defined position the luminance wil fal domm wh a constant gradient towards the veryend ofthe side range A smaller value leads to a sharper tof but there are two iting actors The resolution ofthe
294. to visualize the position and orientation oF each one Figure 136 The source UD fles 7 UbEdior gare vog The esting Un 204 Dynamic LID Editor 10444 Introduction and Principle The LucidShape LiD dtr also can be used for dynamic LID files While the dimensions one and two dene the intensity over the angular range uo dimension three can be any physical para meter An additional dimension is introduced when the number of sets is larger than o LID editing of dynamic adaptive systems is one possible application of LucidShape s LiD editar The UD editor supports the creation and interpolation of 30 LID fles For example one can morph different LDS into each other Possible applications for the LID editor af dynamike adaptive systems are AFS bending light or the design of different kinds of wider or narrower high beam pattem Light data and or any other arbitrary distributions are normally displayed in LacidShape overa 2D UV angular parameter range 3D data in turn holds a third parameter which can be any arbitrary geometrical or physical parameter Ike road curvature We allthis third parameterw inthe UVData Views one can navigate through this uvw data by pressing the right mouse button While LucidShape Supports the handling o D data the LID editoris designed o work with 3D data oniy Individual 30 data consists of sets Each set describes a sub uncton of motion Ie the movement afa hotspot a
295. toall emiting rays Use the default value co for air medium for al setups without refractors An indes diferent rom zo indicates tht the emiter resides na medium with that index Accordingly the rays wil be displayed as dotted nes Inside the medium and straight nes once they pass any refractor surface The absorption coefficient determines the absorption of the medium when starting in one spectral power distribution Here the spectral power distribution can be specified exp Spo in detall in Section 7 2 8 Spectral Power Distribution SPD The emitter types and their respective specifi parameters are described in detail in the folowing subsections 724 Lambertian Emitter The igt iseminedwitha Lambertian distribution Le acosine tition dound the surtace normal A Lambertian emine surface appears always the same ges o tne eye of the beoe Beside the default setting the beam spread cosine distribution can be Teducedorenrgedbyan exponen Tedicibuon pas The om cos to the power of N ll cos u The beam half angle is defined as the angle th so tend clad va aros AHH value of 6o complies with the standandlamberlan emitter Directional Emitter 72 E TA jariton the parameters Qux fia sart retraction ndei deste above it has no additional parameters M d E Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials 723 Isoradiant Emitter This light emitter emits light in al directions with an equal intensity t
296. token pram a ow ean ECE LID E Analysis of Geometry and LID Data 9 4 Analysis of 3D Geometry 943 Bounding Box The bounding box doesnot have a dialog or any options or parameters canbe applied onto the rently active GeoView and considers al extended 20 and 3D abjects like cures surfaces and point clouds but no single paints or vectors The bounding bax is the smallest possible cuboid containing the entire model the single planes perpendicular to the global anis system It states the minimum and maximum values for al three dimensions respectively together with their respective extent 9 4 2 Visualize Volume Sensor Uses planar sections to visualize volume sensor ight datan the geometry Vien Tre ight data must have been collected In a previous simulation e Feature one The name ofthe feature this the denterin the TreeView pulldown menu Im case there is more than one sensar in the model can bese a lected fam the ist sin value max value Defines tne range af the light data to be displayed within the geometry view A value of 1 means unlimited al values in the GeoView below the minimum are shown in black allvalues above he maximum are shown In red plane orthogonal o The planar sections on which the light data wil be displayed may be positioned orthogonal to her the x y of zai show plone Switches to the plane wit the assigned index You can use the arrow keys to scroll in the planar sections set
297. try of Street Human end LID on the od inu 3 Applications Aer the start up ofthe Street lumination application the geometry and UVData windows appear see igure right above along with tne stretlumination dialog window AsampleLIDis preloaded to generate the UV data Forth street illumination application we speak ofa length as the direction or a distance whichis rented along the road following the driving direction Consequently we speak of a width ifa direction or length rns across the road perpendicular to the driving direction Road Types Far street lighting applications t Is In some cases not sufficient to create sufficient lamination Dut it is also required to provide a certain amount of luminance from the roadway surface The results from the according legal requirements The European regulations of DIN EN 3203 for ex ample demand minimum values for the average road luminance for the classification of streetlights Within the ME MEW classes medium to high velocity roads To akute the luminance from the incident illumination the so called table are used These contain the reduced reflectance coeficients of diferent types of asphalt or concrete that are con dered representative or common raad surfaces The exact geometries foe the luminance calculation are slightly diferent between the different regulations and can be found n textbooks on the fun damentais of general and exterior lighting in Lucite the
298. ts the selected abject about the x y or ranis asisto anis The abject is moved tothe chosen anis system with or without the of axis to anis pattern Hare the object is pple and copied ato every ans sytem i sass pattern th or without the ose ag ith fom os unchecked the selected object is moved to the chosen anis system tis keeping te ose ene global coordinates now lative to rhe destination anis system Iebedid the selected object is moved dieci om the abject mis system upper selection o the destination anis stem Cower Selection nou he oet aon pea i n T halten Ere Cie Bante RESESHETOETT ea xw Ge Q5 para eaaa Figure 4 3 The Dialogs for Minar Arts to Anis amd As to Anis Pte m Geometry 4 23 Set Global Axis This option sets the selected anis system as the global als system All space objects wll be transformed relative to the postion and orientation af that new global axis system 424 Conversion of Curves and Surfaces Thetoolsunder Geometry gt Conve supply conversion between various uve and surface formats m E to MURAS Surfaces Converts ether the selected or ali surfaces in the geometry view to NURBS surfaces to Mesh Surfaces Tesseltes either the selected or all surfaces to triangular Mesh surfaces to B zier Patches Conventseither the selected oral surfaces to ser patches This conversion can only be performed for untrimmed surfaces to MURBS Curve
299. uantities lm Note that spectral simula ons with photometric quantities are scaled with a so called V lambda curve to account for the reception characteristics af the human eye This choice determines the physical unit stored in the resulting Rayfle when usinga ray fle sensorto record the simulated rays 1f checked the sensors will not be cleared when starting the next simulation deleting he stored data but will keep thealready Simulated rays so thenest simulation wil be added to the already obtained data hiss kind of a manual version ofsimulating with looos Usually aniy a very small percentage ofthe rays intersecting wth aretrartive surface are reflected due to the fresnel equations To Increase this percentage significantly this parameter was added toray race dlalog Avalueaf o means that the simulation takes place as usual Le aniy a smalt amount of rays s reflected and the majority af the Tays are transmitted the ato ofthese two amounts is determined byte two media the surface is separating Avalos wil result inthis new behaviour The rays are starting t the emitter as usual Wen intersecng the rst surface oo of them willbe reflected 52v wil be transmitted s is a big iferencetotha sal e reflected by standard window la The intensity of the rays is weighted that tne resulting amount of light in the sensor Qim i etc is exactly the same as when using Avale of means that this special procedure wil be performed forth
300. uousiyin the direc ton ofthe lens diameter and therefore can eliminate spherical aberration polynomial degree side surface lens type rotational extruded rot ex iruded tonis inner outer diameter stant sweep angle thickness height innerjouter output angie The polynomial degres af the profi cuve checked creates an additional inner surface The lens type Possible values are rotational extruded rotational earuded torus The lens ype The two radii ofthe rotational tens Usually the inner radius is The start and sweep angle for the rotational surface The lensis created fom start to start sweep Thethiciness of the lens and the position ofthe lens onthe z sis The outgoing ray angles for the inner and the outer parto he lens ET eue mca in edt it tende Fite le i i mE es Fore si Th basie aspheric lens dialog tou the st coor set pame axis system and materia Er reperies p 2 Aspheric Lens Per Formula Creates anasphercallens rom the given formula which might be outlined in diferent ways in diferent text books The parameters can easy be entered with he subsequent dialog box 7 Geonety verter rods 8 conie constant Te vertex radius or radius of curvature alters the curvature of the lens The conical constant which alters the shape of the lens kt hyperboloid k x paraboloid 4 k o elipsoid k o circles k Yaellipsoid coefficients
301. ure or rifes inneriens Cheek to place all structure on the inside of the lens pointing towards the source outer side s planar Uncheck to Invert side surface Uncheck to deactivate the other surface outer inner ofthe lens upright slopes Selects an algorithm which creates upright slopes instead of Slanted anes Diference is stronger at larger thicknesses focal position The location ofthe focal point xy determines the position af the lens keeping it at focal length refraction index The index ofrefraction of the tens material is applied to all inter faces surfaces ofthe lens degree Polynomial degree afa tens curve ac Av overall base thickness whlch s added to structural features From Geometries Menu Selection tar Number of cuve segments arcs Extrusion type parameters extrusions length from to Specily the boundaries ofthe extrusion start stop ithe local anis u system Torus ring type parameters start sweep angle Starting angle and sweeping range of the lenses ac I focus radius The focal radius is added to the radii of the lens 5 6 Procedural Surface PS Reflector This group of FF geometries creates a PS Reflector with different base Toms Ialowstheuserto define different focal postions forthe horizont al H and vertical V curvature ofthe reflector The concept of Procedural Surface Application PSA is used for both reflectors and refractors in LucidShape The respective dialogs hav
302. urve degree The polynomial curve degree ores The number afars to be calculated used only in the approxima tion smoothing factor factor controling an extra glabal smoothing Used oniy for the approximation method smoothness selector for the smoothing Nag point tangent curvature Used niy for the approximation method E sia pom eme mun p I nnd gum mt i cet Fieber serrure rors sir om mn eee Ema o 3 e as Feier MTTNNITITERITT FPE ETE owe 47 The Curve rom Forma dido Geometry 4 4 8 Curve between two Curves Creates a new surface spanned by two curves A istcue secondcuwe The two curves which wil be used as borders 449 Curves from NURBS Surface Border Computesthe boundary curves om aset ofuser selected NURBS surfaces and returns themas NURBS curves into the model Te degrees ofthe Computed curves corresponds to the degree of the input surfaces A oon timmed surface s boundary curve is defined as the surface s Subsets related to the uv parameters vti Uis Va VV Where pata and uaa aree parameter Uns 4430 Curves from Trimmed Surface Border Computes the boundary curves fom a set of user selected trimmed sur faces and returns them as NURBS curves into the model The degrees of the computed curves is fied ta Atimmed surface s boundary curve is defined as the image ofthe sur face s w trim bound under the surface 4
303. us prism andthe start of the nert prism Whereas when using prism the point is calculated as the spatial centre afthe end af the gap and the start ofthe prism This results Ina modification of both tne previous gapand the following prism E Fresform Geometries Menu Selection show ais Check this boxtodisplaythe axes ofall prisms This can help you adjusting the main parameters especialy gamma angles and p Finaly the desired light direction has to be specified to control the ide orientation aF the prisms This has majorinfuenceonthe calculation ofthe prism angles Alsa the spine cuve must be chosen with base surface light direction vector light target position spine for prism bond button test surfaceuve button set Material button oll individual 5 10 Dotmask for Backlighting An addtional base surface can be linked here Each prism along the spine curve will obtain its normal from its projected position Dn this surface hie has certain advantages for decorative or ambien lighting designs A certain vector is defined as the desired ight direction Le the Individual apticat axis af the light to be designed This the standard setting for signal automotive functions This is the near field setting of the light direction vector to focus light output onto a certain postin Can be also used to spec a positionin global coordinates to create convergent or divergent ligt spreadarto compensate divergence in
304. used to perform a manual simulation at a certain angle e g tocheckthesize ofthe emitter see above The corredi refraction Inde atmateay staken om he mode donot aert wr Applications fog BSDF relative to specular This lag has to be checked fr reflective material and unchecked button reset button next back button set buttons rn ali button animate button stop animation button make BSDF button nto model forreractve materia In case the BSDF data was created with the wong seting you can toggle the data via the context menu and then re save it the UWiew states rel to spec when the data is relative to specular pressed the emitter is moved to the initial position and orient ation additional the single simulation is done pressed the emitter is set to the next previous angle par ad ditional the single simulations dane tough the angle pars form a two dimensional amay these tombinations are tested le a list IF pressed the emitr isset anto the chosen combination Le ist entry pressed the complete aray of angle pairs s rn through e Carding the single snlation rests in The automaticaly created pressed an endless loop of simulations is started Pressing this button stops the animation Wt pressed the LiD data is converted into BSDF data Please note Without this conversion the recorded data cannot be used to create an actor material pressed a rudimentary geometry with a light source anda sensor
305. values are reported as well find min nan Finds the overall LD minimum masimum value The w peston comesponding to the min max value is reported as well This logis non editable and requires no input by the user zone mean measure Measures the mean intensity in a specified zane in the UWView integroi fux Computes the overall LID luxin lumen This dialogis non editable and requires na input by the user fux in zone Computes the LID fux in lumen in a specified rectangular zone E Analysis of Geometry and LID Data 9 2 LID Modeling This section offers few tools to model uv data views according to regulations 923 Trim Cutoff nes This menu entry pops up a dialog with several buttons each one offering a specifi LID cut off ike ECE cutoff for low abeam application t fr the UV data view in focus This does not change the geometry tony applied onto the LD 1 Zeenrs cron seemacunro n EET per Zooni Cua pe ENTIA perssmevo cunm Zire 5 cun Passu Cuota Zaans zeemeRtiDaavES Zeemes camas Zeenen Daray LES Zaa Sies cunas arete izen w utis Zwe MRES ncmo Zoret RIAC w ELES Zren pees Ouma Zon BES Cuore Zeem nen Les caosa pires Me Trim UD Diog The following picture shows an example ofa non automotive LID before eft gar and afte ight par the cutoff Zone IN ES Cut Of Co 57D has been aped E Analysis of Geometry and LID Data ee ST ES Fare 6 AUD before e and eter oh applying
306. vature is the curvature afa road defined as one divided by the curve radius E Chapter 11 Applications The LucdStudio Applications menu offers a collection ofvery specific tasks and setups merely for automotive lighting purposes Please refer tothe chapters Geometry and Freeform Geometries which descibes this collection in detail 314 General Automotive Application sus Static Road Simulation This application simulates a static road driving situation It sets the lamp and sensor properties for a static road simulation and checks he light distribution of automobile headlamps on th raad The sample le can be found within the installation at eamptestautomotveligh ngvoadSimu lation n contrast to the rest of LuciShape the coordinate system used here is almost identical othe ne in LucidDrive The origin 0 0 0 af the coordinate system is located at fant of the car on the cantre ne on the road The xa points straight ahead towards the measuring wall and is the main ight propagation direction The y axis points to the left and the z axis upwards So the default mounting positions of the two headlamps with o 1 20 625 and 624 625 mean that both lamps are mounted directi in tront oF the car at xa the left beam ay zm the right beam at y 2 4m Le the aris located on the driving lane In a right hand traffic and 6257 above the Toad tthe very bottom ofthe main dialog one is able to change the number af singe lamp
307. where the tip ofthe cones treated on the touch point The length ofthe start ray the cone angle and the number af raysin 6 and p can Be entered It can be determined in which direction Q Y ar Z the rays should run and an indicator allows to Switch between both sides of te surface se area ise ach wey ammente TT coping T ogo sme hie I rune cringe B Figure 6 The Tip Cone On Normal Bud Dialog radio button front side back A direction indicator for rays going into the frant or back side If side checked this disables the XX ef X options o Mehecked forcestheraystopropagate into he predefined direc tion Le sk X 9 42 2 Disables the front back side choice start ray length The length af each start ray cone angle The opening angle of the cone mumberofmyein amp p The polar grid size which builds the cone bundle 6 5 9 RayFlle Bundle Creates a ray ile bundle The rays are read from a fle Only those rays ich are clase enough ta the ideal ray rom the start to the target point are used The angle limit angle threshold controls the closeness Le Wich rays are used Light Sources ene ein Meimiegekge ae pate oc m I ff dese T_T Fo 88 Figure 27 The Roe Runde Dialog angle threshold The opening angle of the rays A smaller ange threshold leads toa narrower ray bundle EE ray fie name The path and the name of the ray fle to be used 6 6 RayFile and Rayfile Tools In this
308. wo engines an aireraft hull anda rear fin The wing he engines and tne fin are covered by a Lux Sensor with LIDData which sled with constant 10 xin each cell We then calculate the required light distribution fortwo light postions One placed on the hull near the wing the other i placed near the rear in The LIDS can be ex amined inthe respective UWiew andare updatedautomatically as soonas you change the postions and press the Apply button 3 Applications Figure 1213 GeoView perle ond eight eus of this aplication 11 2 2 Test Room for Indoor Lighting This application simulates the illumination in a test room The sample fle is located at Jsamplestestioomtestioom do This sample demonstrates the use af the Gather Sensor Light method For a scene where all sensor objects have a far distance to the light sources with respect to the light source size we may apolythe gather sensor ight method In this method the light ineach sensoris directly gathered fom each light source Here na effects Ike reflection over other objects are taken ilo account only shielding among each other is considered n our scenario a test room with 3 walls and a oor s laminated by a point light source with a UDEmitter The number af point light sources n u and v their distances and the start edge point may be entered The IDEmiter usesa pre calculated or a measured luminous intensity distribution Stored in a LID fle The
309. x length of ays Controls the length of ihe rays Create Polyiines Performs the creation ofthe polylines 4210 5 Create Cylinder rom Rays Captures rays trom the GeoView and generates these rays as cylinders in other words it creates a geometry stored In an Objectvector These Tays then can be used and exported to CAD systems Ta delete polylines use the TreeView or Geometry Selec AIPolynes and the delete button The rays can be deletedasusual with tne delete ray button The thickness and length ofthe cylinder rays also can be controlled thickness of ays Controls the thickness ofthe ras man length of rays Controls the length af the rays create cylinder Performs the creation ofthe cylinders 4304 Create Annotation Text An annotation tent can be created at a position defined by the origin in the geometry view origin xyz The position where the annotation text is created offset bev A pul offset to fine tune the annotation poston Geomety annotation text The annotation text please note that country speci icletters and characters wil not be shown in the GeoView hee LS tete 4 10 7 Create Annotation Bitmap An annotation bitmap can be created at a position defined by the origin Inthe geomet view origin sua The position where the annotation bitmap is created EN Opens a fle selection window to select an existing image from the computer offset tay A pixel fle to fine tune the annotation s post
310. x of the device s given Getting started with Lucudia Figure 135 UV Data Ve Senso eft picture nde sensar igh bth unfitered The UV Data Views provide you with the sensor data You have two lux sensors the plane and the paraboloid and he candela sensor The tatter ls shown in Figure 25 UV Data View lux sensor en picture and cd sensor right both unfiltered The context menu RME aF the UV Data View arthe menu UWiew oers you a variety of options to post process your results You wil id detalls on the available commands In ali UV Data Views in Section 3 4 UV View of Chapter 3 Views 7 Next we want to analyze the efect of particular parts othe reflector on ts imaging properties so we perform an interactive ray rac Open a light screen view hie in the geometry view ether select fom the context menu ar press the tool bar button ES 3 Press Cutt and the LMB hile pointing somewhere on the reflector n the geometry view you wili see a few rays emanating rom the light source while n the ight screen View the image of the light source on a wallis displayed 9 Move around with the mouse while keeping pressed i and LMB simultaneously a CTRL pls Double Cickon LMB in the Geometry View freezes the current traced ray path Select the data view window where the piane with the llminaton sensor s displayed Select Properties rom the context menu deselect logarithmic scale and press OC Finally iter
311. x ofa materialin the visible spectral range There are two ways to add a medium into the model either by selecting a medium from the media lrary provided in LucidShape orto define an own medium The library s sorted n the categories lass among ather Hikari Hoya Schott etc and plastic among other voi Itis accessible via Select select from ibrary Thesecondwayistousetheoptiondefine spectrum to define the behaviour afthe new medium medium name The name ofthe created medium GEM refraction index The retraction index ofthe medium This single value wil be i nored ifa a spectral simulation is performed and b a spectral Tefractlon distribution is set absorption coefficient The absorption coefficient a this is not a percentaged value but determines the exponential decay oF intensity in an absorbing medium This single value wil be Ignored fa a spectral simata onis performed and b a spectral absorption distribution isset spectral refraction distribution This is used in spectral simulations instead of the average index af retraction See Section 7 6 Spectral Refection Refraction and Absorption Distributions z Emitter Actor and Sensor Materials ERE eme mm ies emm me mE owe 7 25 The Create Medium Dialog the Control curves Jor dispersion and absorption can be set Independently spectral absorption distribution This is used in spectral simulations instead ofthe aver
312. y distribution LID af same Kind On the other hand ane has different modules each ane providing different LIDs One can ask the question can combine the individual light intensity distributions from the modules n order ta get the perfect desired LID An isa which mathematically operations on each LID have t be performed for his goal Instead af running a simulation with a large number af modules one can simulate the indvidual modules and add their results with te LID Editor But the combination of individual IDs should not replace the simultin ofthe modelas a whole Using the LID editor can be the first step before the development work begins 10 2 LID Editor Gallery Tho gallery can be launched via Menu UV Analysis LID Edtor Gallery and contains several examples Le pre defined setups The dialog is split into two selection lists The upper part isthe main intended purpose of the beam or light in tne lower part the detailed specification can be se lected Pressing load will oad the curently selected entry in a new model while add wil add this selection into the curentiyactive model Fires Te UD Ete Gallery E ubtdior 10 3 LID Editor The eto can be launched via Menu gt UVIAnalyss LID Editor here na pre defined IDs re included In case the dialog wil not pop up automaticaly lease open it from the entry inthe Treeview 2034 Loading UIDs nts tab tis possible to set the number af id est
313. y tee You can ezecute tne script vith the execute button The resulting pinout transferred t te message view nds eade fles a tex view displays the Te These Wes can be Tm eles inoue lug door Min Res he bw ay Hes sed for ray He tight sources Defaut Lucidshape Fi Types erma Bescon sam Resp geomet es mesh sures NURBS curves and sr faces faces and ep E stereo tography format with angular patches Binary or ASC M be detected d imple Point sequences r3 Ices geomeuy is ap sp STEP geometry ex ier Geometers Fe Format pescriptions eS ie dibus se aEgndistibuon a EULUMDAT gh dibus formator European amp maker Um bet eometertomat E Luci shape Fle Types Fle format Descriptions ans optori goniometer format Chew kanzu Seiki Gonometer ight intensity data aie ASAP ip intensity dat an SAP igt intensity data esv on goniometer ight intensity data in Excel tert the Photometry ie yes EJ Appendix B t of Toolbar Icons The program shows different toal bars foreach view ype on focus For a detailed description about sach tol referto the text above in the appropriate chapter B Common Tools few Document aia OP ie Ad Fl Open Fe ean iy sme Fle As and Save fle 1G Open Pint review EXE tevens Te views erty Tle Views Horizortaly T esse beach view B 2 View Options and Manipulation Tools open T
314. ylinder a sphere ora cone This way g the light arcs in discharge lamps ke DiR can be simulated more realistically ne ra anna gue oe mme for cn on utem gie pd perum BE omes toten tnter Fre 6 The Votame Light Source Dialog Pressing select object allows to select a geometry from the GeoView or TreeView this base surface serves as the outer boundary ofthe volume to be created Only cylinder sphere ar cone shaped surfaces are allowed here Please note Unike almost all other ight sources the volume light source cannot be transformed by this tab To alter the origin andthe orientation af the emitter open the Edit Dialog of the marked entry and change the values within tab orientation E Light Sources 6 3 2 LED Point Light S This point ight source uses aight emitter with light intensity distribution taken froma curve The curve s calculated as an ExplictCurve where the entered pairs af degree and degree value define the ValueRow and thus the directional characters re og create complet point og with Pag oval ight light intensity horizontal light intensity vertical polynomial degree owe 6 The LED Paint gh Source Dialog Ichecked a complete point light source iscreated when pressing apply Otherwise only an emitter material is created 5 25 degree If checked the interim values can be entered too hereby the characteristic can be specif

LucidStudio User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents